Home

2010 Infiniti QX56 Owner`s Manual

1. A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat Keep seatbacks as upright as pos sible after fitting the child restraint Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child re straint while in the vehicle When the child restraint is not in use keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt In a sudden stop or colli sion loose objects can injure occu pants or damage the vehicle A CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating sur face and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system referred to as the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem Some child restraints include rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be con nected to these anchors For details see LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem later in this section If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint the vehicle seat belts can be used Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes When se lecting any child restraint keep the following points in mind Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the child restraint in your vehicle
2. WRS0475 Forward facing step 10 10 If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate If this light is not illuminated see Front passenger air bag and status light in this section Move the child restraint to another seating position Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted the ALR mode child re straint mode is canceled LRS0340 2nd row captain s chairs if so equipped LRS0361 2nd row bench seat if so equipped INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP 2nd row captain s chairs or 2nd row bench seat if so equipped First secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors 2nd row captain s or bench out board seating positions only or the seat belt as applicable 1 If necessary raise or remove the head re straint to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed See Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 47 Head restraint adjustment in this section for head restraint adjustment removal and installation information The center position of the 3rd row bench seat is the seating position that can use a top tethe
3. A WARNING Properly secure all cargo to help pre vent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Be sure to secure all four hooks into the retainers The cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 30 Ibs 13 6 kg or the net may not stay secured instruments and controls 2 45 AWARNING Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the roof rack Heavy loading of the roof rack has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or abnor mal handling maneuvers e Roof rack load should be evenly distributed e Do not exceed maximum roof rack load weight capacity e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury A CAUTION ROOF RACK Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack If you cannot comfort ably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground use a ladder or stool 2 46 Instruments and controls Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof rack Do not load more than 200 Ibs 91 kg on entire roof rack Be sure load is evenly distributed across both crossbars Be careful that your ve hicle does not excee
4. LPD0391 FUEL FILLER CAP The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove To tighten turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling AWARNING Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi tions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire e Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement It has a built in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis sion control system An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 STEERING WHEEL Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer Static electricity A CAUTION If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body can cause an explosion of flammable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable f
5. To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch The set vehicle speed will decrease by approxi mately 5 MPH 5 km h for Canada Push then quickly release the COAST SET switch Each time you do this the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 MPH 1 km h for Canada To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h ACCEL RES _ COAST SET CANCEL ON ci How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead The distance to the vehicle ahead can be se lected at any time depending on the traffic con ditions Each time the DISTANCE switch is pressed the set distance will change to long medium short and back to long again in that sequence Approximate distance at Distance Display 60 MPH 100 km h ft m Pa Long pi CRUISE Bune 195 60 Middle K0 m Euo 130 40 The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed The higher the vehicle speed the longer the dis tance If the engine is stopped the set distance becomes long Each time the engine is started the initial setting becomes long The CRUISE indicator light will app
6. When the driver s door is opened with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to LOCK with the driver s door open The driver s seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position When the driver s door is closed with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P Park position The entry exit function can be adjusted or can celed See Comfort amp convenience settings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual Restarting the entry exit function If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the entry exit function will be disabled Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the entry exit function You can also restart the entry exit function using the following proce dure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position The entry exit function should now work properly SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH 7 km h When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner iS Operating When the adjusting s
7. while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly indicating successful programming NOTE When programming a garage door opener etc it is advised to unplug the device dur ing the cycling process to prevent pos sible damage to the garage door opener components OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver once pro grammed may now be used to activate the ga rage door etc To operate simply press the ap propriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries position the hand held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you continue to have programming difficulties please contact
8. 3 12 Keys For Intelligent Key system 3 2 L Labels Air conditioner specification label 9 11 C M V S S certification label 9 10 Emission control information label 9 10 Engine serialnumber 9 10 F M V S S certification label 9 10 Tire and Loading Information label 9 11 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Warning labels for SRS 1 66 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System a so a ee a 1 33 License plate Installing the license plate 9 11 LM US eo ae Se ee oo ee 3 18 Lift gaterelease 044 3 22 Light Air bag warning light aaa aa 1 67 2 13 Brake light See stop light 8 28 Bulb check instrument panel 2 8 Bulb replacement 8 28 Charge warning light 2 10 Foo light SWC ow a 44 46 40 e 2 29 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 24 Headlight control switch 2 25 ANUS oe se i ye ok aeaa aaa 8 27 Interior light 38 ac moe oh ey home A 2 52 Light DUDS i ccs oe ee ee wk ee ee 8 27 Low tire pressure warning light 2 11 Low washer fluid warning light 2 19 Passenger air bag and status light 1 61 Personal lights 2 53 10 4 Security indicator light aoaaa 2 14 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders gon ch od ea ale e 2 8 Lights Map TOMS o s sss ee ee he a 2 54 Lock Child safety rear
9. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement close the lid se curely Ifyou will not be using the remote control for long periods of time remove the batteries Replacement of the batteries is needed when the remote control only functions at extremely close distances to the DVD player or not at all Be careful not to touch the battery terminal An improperly disposed battery can harm the environment Always confirm local regu lations for battery disposal When changing batteries do not let dust or oil get on the remote control and head phones FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This de vice may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB ham radio or car phone in your INFINITI be sure to observe the following precautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts AWARNING e A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Some ju
10. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position the power folding seats are always operational If the ignition switch is in the ON position the power folding seats are only operational when the shift selector is in P Park or N Neutral If the engine is started during operation the seat s will temporarily pause NOTE Operating the power folding seats can dis charge the vehicle battery if the vehicle is not running Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 19 SEAT BELTS PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced INFINITI strongly encourages you and all of your passen gers to buckle up every time you drive even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag Most U S states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven 1 20 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LO WA ie Sit upright and weil back A WARNING A WARNING Every person who drives or rides in this The seat belt should be properly ad vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit Failure to do so may times Children s
11. Technical and consumer information 9 13 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re duces the available cargo and lug gage load capacity of your vehicle Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Measurement of Weights later in this section Also check tires for proper inflation pres sures See the Tire and Loading Informa tion label 9 14 Technical and consumer information LTI0089 Cargo area ceiling tie down hooks SECURING THE LOAD There are tie down hooks located in the cargo area as shown The tie down hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps Do not apply a total load of more than 55 Ibs 245 N to a single plastic hook or 44 Ibs 196 N to a single plastic hook when securing cargo Do not apply a total load of more than 110 Ibs 490 N to a single metal floor tie down hook when securing cargo LTI0090 Cargo area floor tie down hooks AWARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place
12. The display menu will remain on the screen for 10 seconds if no subsequent control activations occur e Use the NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate within the display menu and use ENTER to select the item NAVIGATION KEYS If media is in activated MENU mode the NAVI GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up Down Left and Right within the menu If display control menu is on the NAVIGATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up Down Left and Right within the menu ENTER In MENU mode press the ENTER button to se lect MENU items In the display menu press the ENTER button to select items for modification as per the on screen instructions MENU If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENU button is pressed the DVD menu will appear on the screen Use the Navigation Keys to navigate within the menu and use ENTER to select the item Press the MENU button again to return to PLAY mode TITLE Press the TITLE button to return the DVD media to the title of the DVD Press the TITLE button again to return to the previous stop point and play BACK Press the BACK button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu SUBTITLE Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitle selection menu Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 65 Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cycle through each available subtitle AUDIO Press the AUDIO button to call up the audio m
13. 4 14 Vehicle identification 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN Chassis number 0005 eee 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle loading information 9 12 Vehicle recovery a aoaaa aaa 6 13 Vehicle security system 2 20 INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 21 3 3 5 11 Ventilators oaa a ee 4 21 VOS e aeaee ea ee le 3 26 Voice recognition system 4 82 Voltmeter oaao oe Gee Se 5 2 7 WwW Warning 4WD warning light 2 11 Air bag warning light aaa 1 67 2 13 Anti lock brake warning light 2 8 2 9 Battery charge warning light 2 10 Brake warning light 2 9 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 10 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 29 Low fuel warning light 2 11 2 12 2 19 Low tire pressure warning light 2 11 Low washer fluid warning light 2 19 Passenger air bag and status light 1 61 Seat belt warning light 2 13 Vehicle security system 2 20 Warning labels for SRS 1 66 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 4 4 ote de ot OH amp oho 2 8 Warning lights lt o ss ocs a te ew ee a ne 2 8 Washer switch Rear window wiper and washer SWITCHES 4 aa 4 2 wh dd aww ed we a 2 23 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 22 Weights See
14. COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM AWARNING Positioning of the heating or air condi tioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in or TT STATUS der that full attention may be given to the driving operation o gt Do not disassemble or modify this sys 12 oon em tem If you do it may result in accidents 11 ae es fire or electrical shock ZOOM IN Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality such as a frozen screen or lack of sound Continued use of the system may result in accident fire or electric shock In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware spill liquid on it or notice smoke or smell coming from it stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest INFINITI dealer Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents fire or electrical shock s STATUS button P 4 6 pi Xd OFF brightness control button DEST button eis O INFO button P 4 6 SETTING button P 4 11 8 VOICE button INFINITI controller P 4 3 PHONE button fF OO N NI 4 2 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 9 BACK previous button P 4 3 10 ROUTE button 11 ZOOM IN button 12 MAP button 13 ZOOM OUT button For Navigation system control buttons refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual For information on the PHONE button see Bluetooth
15. Liquid type air fresheners typically clip on the vents These products can cause imme diate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces Carefully read and follow the manufacturer s in structions before using the air fresheners FLOOR MATS The use of genuine INFINITI floor mats can ex tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior No matter what mats are used be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they be come excessively worn Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle includes two driver s side front floor mat brackets and one passenger s side front floor mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place INFINITI floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model The driver s side floor mat has two grommet holes incorporated in it and the passenger s side has one grommet hole Position each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet holes while cen tering the mat in the footwell Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them See Seat belt maintenance inthe Safety Seat
16. Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 19 OPERATING TIPS When the shift selector is shifted to R Re verse the monitor screen automatically changes to the RearView Monitor mode However the radio can be heard It may take some time until the RearView Monitor is displayed after the shift selector has been shifted to R Reverse Objects may be distorted momentarily until the Rear View Monitor screen is displayed com pletely When the shift selector is returned to a position other than R Reverse it may take some time until the screen changes Objects on the screen may be distorted until they are completely displayed When the temperature is extremely high or low the screen may not clearly display ob jects This is not a malfunction When strong light directly enters the cam era objects may not be displayed clearly Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper This is not a malfunction The screen may flicker under fluorescent light This is not a malfunction The colors of objects on the RearView Moni tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object When the contrast of objects is low at night pressing the SETTING button may not change the brightness Objects on the monitor may not be clear ina dark place or at night If dirt rain or snow attaches to the camera the RearView Monitor may not display ob jec
17. Press OFF to turn the system off Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation The SS mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger com partment to prevent fogging in defrost floor or def floor modes Push the air recirculation button S amp F to recir culate interior air inside the vehicle Push the AUTO button to return to automatic mode Air flow control Pushing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet rv Air flows from center and side vents 74 Airflows from center and side vents and foot outlets Air flows mainly from foot outlets Fi Air flows from defroster and foot outlets Q7 Air flows from defroster outlets To turn system off Press the OFF button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 23 OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds However this is not a malfunction After the coolant tempera ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally The sunload sensor 1 located on the top center of the instrument panel helps the system main tain a constant temperature Do not put anything on or around this sensor 4 24 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems
18. The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Under these conditions the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest INFINITI dealer Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags side air bags curtain and rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one time only basis As a reminder unless it is damaged the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by an INFINITI dealer When maintenance work is required on the ve hicle the front air bags side air bags curtain and rollover air bags pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance The ignition switch sho
19. To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum cargo hauling Q Pull the strap forward located in the center of each seat cushion and fold each seat cushion toward the front of the vehicle 2 Then lift up on the recline lever on the side of 8 There is a carpet panel flap on the back of the outboard seats to fold the outboard seat each seat that can be folded toward the backs flat To fold the center seatback flat back of the vehicle pull up on the strap on the edge of the center seat cushion and fold the seatback toward the front of the vehicle Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 17 4 The carpet panel flap provides a level cargo floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded flat 5 To return the outboard 2nd row bench seats to a seating position reverse the process for the outboard seats 6 To return the center seat to a seating posi tion lift up on the pull strap on the back of the seat base while lifting on the seatback Then push the seat cushion back into place Make sure to hold the seat belts above the seat cushion and properly raise the seatback to an upright position Then push the seat cushion down into place 3RD ROW POWER FOLDING SEATS The 3rd row power folding seat controls are located behind the 2nd row seat passenger s side on the 3rd row cup holder console 4 There are also controls located on the rear quar ter trim panel behind the 3rd row seats passen
20. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi tion push the POWER switch to turn the audio system on oN Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 51 MODE select switch Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the following sequence PRESET A PRE SET B PRESET C Music Box CD CompactFlash DVD if so equipped AUX These modes are only available when compat ible media storage is inserted into the device This mode is only available when music has been downloaded into the Music Box hard disk drive audio system This mode is only available when a compatible auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack Volume control switch Push the volume control switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume VY AN Tuning Memory change radio While in one of the preset radio station banks A B or C push the tuning switch W or AN for less than 1 5 seconds to change to the next preset station in memory Seek tuning radio Push the tuning switch WV or AN for more than 1 5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station Next Previous track CD CF Push the tuning switth V or 4N for less than 1 5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks This system searches for the blank intervals be tween selections If there is a bl
21. 3 25 Aiming control headlights 2 27 Air bag See supplemental restraint SSON ca uy a eG ee ak Ww ee 1 52 Air bag system Front See supplemental front impact air bag system aed e w w g aa 1 59 Air bag warning labels 1 66 Air bag warning light 1 67 2 13 Air cleaner housing filter 8 17 Air conditioner Air conditioner service 4 25 Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations 9 6 Heater and air conditioner controls 4 22 Rear seat air conditioner 4 24 Servicing airconditioner 4 25 Alarm system See vehicle security system 2 20 Anchor point locations 1 36 Antenna 3 8 0 4 hao moe amp 2 ewe we Ook OS 4 54 Anti lock brake warning light 2 8 2 9 Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 50 Audible reminders 2 15 Audio system 2 5 6 Bo awe ew 4 26 Compact disc CD player 4 37 Audio System CompactFlash CF player 4 39 Audio system FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD POY 465 64 te ae oa Cae ee 4 34 Audio System Music Box hard disk drive audio Sores oot oe eee eee ee 4 41 Audio system FRAGIO as 4 os i ae dos oe ee ow aoe ee 4 26 Rear audio controls 4 53 Audio System SCHINGS chee ee he ee ae we Swe eS 4 34 Audio system Steering wheel audio control switch
22. 4 51 Autolight switch 2 2 4 268 ee A eae a 2 26 Automatic Automatic drive positioner 3 29 Automatic power window switch 2 49 Automatic transmission position indicator NOME 4G 2 2 eee ee ee ee 2 19 Driving with automatic transmission 5 13 Transmission selector lever lock release 2 5 16 Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 27 Automatic door locks 3 6 AUX jack a papon he hd oe a Mom on 4 39 B Battoly o e ee kk ke oe Bate oe ow ee 8 13 Charge warning light 2 10 Before starting the engine 5 11 Belt See drive belt 0 8 15 Block heater EMOUNG e ate oe as oy oe ee ee as 2 we 5 56 Bluetooth hands free phone system 4 70 Boosterseats 2000 1 49 Brake Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 50 Brake assist for Intelligent cruise control SV SION a p We Sach Be ese eh A a E a 5 38 Brake Md s a esa a tod ae Set we 4 8 12 Brake light See stop light 2 8 28 Brake system 24 5 49 Brake warning light 2 9 Brake wear indicators a 2 15 8 22 Parking brake operation 5 17 Self adjusting brakes 8 22 Blakes i auna o i a eoe ee eo ee amp er eS 8 22 Break in schedule 5 40 Brightness control Instrument panel 2 28 Brightness contrast button 4 18 Bulb check instrument panel 2 8 Bulb replacem
23. Changing engine oil 8 For hot climates viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0 C 32 F 9 See your INFINITI dealer for service 9 2 Technical and consumer information FUEL RECOMMENDATION INFINITI recommends the use of premium un leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research octane number 96 If unleaded premium gaso line is not available you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number Research octane number 91 but you may notice a decrease in performance A CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty Gasoline specifications INFINITI recommends using gasoline that meets the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC specifi cations where it is available Many of the automo bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications Reformulated gasoline Some fuel s
24. Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals 4 22 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling or heating auto This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a con stant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Push the AUTO button on AUTO will be displayed 2 Turn the driver s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature Driver and passenger tem peratures can be set independently Press DUAL to activate dual climate control func tions Turn the passenger s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired passenger s temperature Adjust the temperature dial to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained
25. E On screen Clock Clock Format 2 4 Offset Adjust cait wiy oC omn JO a x H Daylight Saving Time Time Zone i Display clock in top right corner of display Clock The following display will appear after pressing the SETTING button then selecting the Clock key using the INFINITI controller and pressing the ENTER button On screen Clock When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system Clock Format Choose either the 12h 1 2 hour clock display or the 24h 24 hour clock display Offset Adjust Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per minute Daylight Savings Time When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated daylight savings time is on To turn off the daylight savings time touch the ON key the amber indicator light will disappear Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 13 Settings gt Time Zone 8 00 saco il A i can i ijf ronn Gon T E Eastern oO ON H g Atlantic 0 ON 1 8 DOWN G Manually select time zone Time Zone Select the Time Zone key the Time Zone screen will appear Select one of the following zones depending on the current location by selecting the correct time zone key and pressing the ENTER
26. Edit the name of the track being played and use Bors Musk Borysem hi 8 00 ance its artist using the keypad displayed on the TT screen For information see How to use the touch screen earlier in this section The category of the track can also be set to Rock Pop Latin Jazz R amp B Hip Hop Club Dance Punk Reggae Folk Blues Country Metal Easy Listening New Age ae Soundtrack Gospel amp Religious World 1 6 Cl assical Children s and Others i Shows the amount of space available for recording i Restore or permanently delete track e Remove Track Reset the mood setting of a track Music Box Used Free Space Mood Categories ai Deleted tems Bu XXXXXXXXX Search Missing Titles Zif XXXXXXKXX jamn Hidden cat wid wd ia wd Restoring deleted data You can also listen to the beginning of each track that has been deleted by performing the follow ing 1 Touch the Menu key and then the Music Box System Info key on the screen Deleted music data can be restored by perform ing the following 1 Touch the Menu key and then the touch the Music Box System Info key on the screen 2 Touch the Deleted Items key and then the 2 Touch the Deleted Items key and then the Play Sample key Album Track key 3 Touch the Restore Album Track key to re store the deleted music data Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition
27. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row The outboard seating positions on the 2nd row bench seat can be tipped forward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row bench seat To enter the 3rd row f lift up on the seatback latch located on the upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd row bench seat and fold the seatback forward at an angle over the seat base This will release the back of the seat so it may be tipped forward 1 6 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Then lift up on the lower corner of the seat base and tip the outboard seating position of the 2nd row bench seat forward To exit the 3rd row bench seat lift up on the same seatback latch and fold the seatback forward onto the seat base Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward HEAD RESTRAINTS AWARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against injury in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head restraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re move
28. NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Outside temperature down to Coolant or equivalent CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level add coolant to the MAX level If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur ized tank When installing the cap tighten it until a clicking sound is heard Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7 If the cooling system frequently requires coolant have it checked by an INFINITI dealer CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT An INFINITI dealer can change the engine cool ant The service procedure can be found in the INFINITI Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat ing AWARNING To avoid the danger of being scalded never change the coolant when the en gine is hot e Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep coolant out of the reach
29. Rear sonar SYSlCM acc eseceite cet teedtweeeee wer reai 5 52 Front sonar system if so equipped 5 5 53 Cold weather driving 00eeee cece eee eee 5 54 Freeing a frozen door lock 000eeaeeee 5 54 AND G6Z602 2 cs00ycdeedueeeseredesady TEE 5 54 Bay capinctapeteeses basemede sete nena eseee 5 54 Draining Of coolant water deccueeseaaedsews de 5 55 Tire equipment ae te eer er cerecntGuareescacus tees 5 55 Special winter equipment 2 002 00 5 50 Driving ON SNOW OF ICG nssssassaanuuuerrrrrnnnuno 5 55 Engine block heater if so equipped 5 56 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING AWARNING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide AWARNING e Do not breathe exhaust gases they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is danger ous It can
30. The Music Box audio system cannot perform recording under the following conditions There is not enough space in the hard drive The number of aloums reaches the maximum of 500 The number of tracks reaches the maximum of 3 000 Automatic recording If the Automatic Recording function is turned to ON recording starts when a CD is inserted For more information see Music Box settings later in this section Stopping recording To stop the recording touch the STOP key on the screen If the CD is ejected the audio system is turned off or the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position the recording also stops Music Box Play by album Y XXXXXXX E XXXXXXX Playing recorded songs Select the Music Box audio system by using one of the following methods Press the mode select switch on the steer ing wheel For information see Steering wheel switch for audio control later in this section Press the MUSIC BOX button Give voice commands For information see INFINITI Voice Recog nition system later in this section Stopping playback The system stops playing when Another mode radio CD CompactFlash or AUX is selected The audio system is turned off The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons Press the SEEK CAT button while a track is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Pre
31. To turn on the cruise control push the ON OFF switch on The CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate To set cruising speed accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your vehicle maintains the set speed To pass another vehicle depress the ac celerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle returns to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills If this happens drive without the cruise control To cancel the preset speed use one of the following three methods Pushthe CANCEL button the SET indicator light in the vehicle information display goes out Tap the brake pedal the SET indicator light goes out Push the ON OFF switch off Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the vehicle information display go out The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the vehicle information display goes out if you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL RES or SET COAST switch The preset speed is deleted from memory the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH 13 km h below the set speed you move the shift selector to N Neutral To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following three
32. Universal Transceiver 2 54 Hood release we eee we ee ae ws 3 18 Hook Luggage hook 2 44 PROM ts 454 Bg e 0 6 2 ere e a ate amp 2 30 l IGHITION SWICH a oe we co Pema eae aes 5 9 Immobilizer system 3 3 5 11 Important vehicle information label 9 10 In cabin microfilter 4 8 17 Increasing fueleconomy 5 40 Indicator lights and audible reminders See warning indicator lights and audible reminders 00 00 eee eee eee 9 8 INFINITI mobile entertainment system 2S ne ee ee 4 54 INFINITI vehicle immobilizer SYSTEM s e aa e aer eae ee aS 2 21 3 3 5 11 INFINITI voice recognition system 4 82 Inside automatic anti glare mirror 3 27 Instrument brightness control 2 28 Instrument panel 0 6 2 2 Instrument panel dimmer switch 2 28 Intelligent cruise control ICC system Brake assist 4244 SAW E eee ee 2 5 38 Intelligent Key system Key operating range 3 9 Key Operation lt s sora remi redai 3 10 Mechanical Keys an aoaaa See aaa 3 3 Remote keyless entry operation 3 12 Troubleshooting guide 3 17 Warning signals s icsi ra veh eee 3 17 interior ight s a aoe ona meaa 2 52 ISOFIX child restraints oaa 1 33 J J mp Starting e a s we Pee a ee 6 8 K Keyfob battery replacement 8 25 Keyless entry With Intelligent Key system See Intelligent Key system
33. light CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty scratched or covered with finger prints may not work properly The following CDs may not work prop erly Copy control compact discs CCCD Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc tion 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter CDs that are not round CDs with a paper label CDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs It has no capability to record or burn CDs If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed CHECK DISC e Confirm that the CD is inserted cor rectly the label side is facing up etc Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches PRESS EJECT This is an error due to excessive tem perature inside the player Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button After a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio sys tem only MP3 or WMA CD CompactFlash CF player Do not force a CF card into the slot This could damage the CF card and or player During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the humidity If this occurs remove the CF card and dehumidify or ventilate the player comp
34. tor light will go out Tap the brake pedal The SET indicator light will go out Turn the ON OFF switch off Both the CRUISE indicator and SET indicator lights will go out To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following three methods Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch Push and hold the ACCEL RES set switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de sire release the switch Push then quickly release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following three methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch Re lease the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed Push then quickly release the COAST SET switch Each time you do this the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h Automatic cancellation A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled When the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH 13 km h below the set speed When the vehicle speed fa
35. 2 4 4mh a0 ew xe a 9 2 Fuel economy a aaoo eee eee 5 40 Fuel gauge aoaaa 2 6 Fuel octane rating saaa aa aa 9 4 Fuel recommendation 9 3 Fuel filler door and cap 3 23 Fuses 5 ok ke ee eee VE oe oe SoA 8 23 F sible INKS 22 2 2 Geh dee eae e amp 8 24 G Garage door opener HomeLink Universal Transceiver 1 ee ee 2 54 GaS CaP e 6 4 ow a ome eek we ee ee 3 23 Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Engine oil pressure gauge 2 6 Fuel gauge 2 00000 2 6 Odometer 454 464 0604 24 Uae ee oS 2 4 Speedometer 20000 2 4 Tachometer assa bw wk eee eo DS 2 5 Trip odometer ais oe a ewww oa bw a 2 4 Voltmeter 0 2 0000 Gs 2 7 General maintenance 8 2 Glass hatch os wv ee a wwe Be OES 3 22 Glove DON a sa sor 222 62 oe eRe m 4 2 37 Glove box lock s2 ics acasa kaw 2 37 H Hands free phone system Bluetooth 4 70 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 29 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 24 Headlight control switch 2 25 Headlights 6 0 6 we eke ooh we ee 8 27 Headlights aiming control 2 27 Headphones See INFINITI mobile entertainment system 4 58 Heated seats 020008 2 30 Heated steering wheel 2 31 Heater Heater and air conditioner controls 4 22 Heater operation 4 23 Rear seat air conditioner 4 24 HomeLink
36. Highlight the Voice Recognition key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button NOTE You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressing the 4 4 switch and saying Help 4 Highlight the User Guide key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button 5 Highlight an item using the INFINITI control ler and press the ENTER button Available items Getting Started Describes the basics of how to operate the Voice Recognition system Finding a Street Address Tutorial for entering a destination by street address Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation Help on Speaking Displays useful tips of speaking for correct command recognition by the system Voice Recognition Settings Describes the available Voice Recognition settings Information gt User Guide Using Voice Recognition With voice recognition you can use voice commands to control navigation audio phone and other functions To start the voice recognition system push the TALK switch on the steering wheel Then say a command after the tone 1 7 Getting started Before using the Voice Recognition system for the first time you can confirm how to use com mands by viewing the Getting Started section of the User Guide 1 Highlight Getting Started and press the ENTER button 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the INFINITI con
37. Pressing the brake pedal with the en gine stopped and or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel e If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive until the brake system has been checked at an INFINITI dealer Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine Is running it may indicate the charging system is not func tioning properly Turn the engine off and check the generator belt If the belt is loose broken missing or if the light remains on see an INFINITI dealer immediately A CAUTION e Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will bypass the variable control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Refer to Variable voltage control system in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section later in this manual Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose broken or missing bone Check suspension warning light This light may indicate a malfunction in the auto leveling suspension For additional information refer to Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual eri a Engine oil pressure low Engine coolant temperature high warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure or high en
38. The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other When the shifting is com pleted the 4WD shift indicator light will come on If the indicator light does not come on immediately make sure the area around the vehicle is safe and drive the vehicle straight accelerate or decelerate or move the vehicle in re verse then shift the 4WD shift switch If the 4WD warning light comes on the 4WD indicator light goes out A CAUTION When the 4WD shift switch is turned to the AUTO position at low ambient tem peratures the 4WD shift indicator light may show 4H If this happens all four wheels are driven as torque distribution is in the 4H position Be careful as the vehicle may become difficult to turn When the vehicle is driven the 4WD shift indicator light should change to AUTO If the 4WD shift indicator light indica tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4H position at low ambient temperatures the 2WD mode may be being engaged due to malfunctioning drive system If the indicator does not return to normal and the 4WD warning light comes on have the system checked by the nearest INFINITI dealer 4WD warning light Comes on or blinks Warning light When There is a malfunc tion in the 4 wheel drive system wA 4wD Comes on ZN The transfer case oil temperature is abnormally high _ QWD Blinks rapidly a oe The difference
39. areas are more likely to be seriousl oo To access the floor storage area push down 4 injured or killed d 4 Side finisher to raise the handle then pull up on the handle to lift the luggage board e Do not allow people to ride in any area When hooking on ropes do not n a load of of your vehicle that is not equipped with more than 55 Ib 245 N to a single A hook or 44 LUGGAGE HOOKS seats and seat belts Ib 196 N to a single hook The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo The child restraint top tether strap may with ropes or other types of straps be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area Secure any items in the cargo area Your child could be seri ously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 2 44 instruments and controls Floor hooks Do not apply a load of more than 110 Ib 490 N to a single hook Re ae ne TER 7 a ages ote fe Sete hs Ona ta eee ee r Se A oem x SS a Se et 4 PB a r re oe I a ee H es oe ete 2566 ete te tata tet ee tet ae Saath te ed ata tatat a e 3 a a ee F a Tez e e A E E S a A C CARGO NET The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while the vehicle is in motion To install the cargo net attach the hooks to the retainers To remove the cargo net detach the hooks from the cargo net retainers
40. bea a8 hw ak we ww 8 32 Tire rotation ca wa com eee em ee we 8 39 Tires of 4 wheel drive 8 41 Types of tires 2 ee 8 38 Uniform tire quality grading 9 29 Wheels andtires 8 32 Wheel tire size 000 9 8 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light 2 11 Tire pressure display 4 8 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Tire rotation maintenance reminder 4 8 Top tether strap child restraint 1 36 Tow mode switch 4 2 33 Towing 2 wheel drive models 6 12 4 wheel drive models 6 13 Fiat OWING ee 2 4 ot om ee a 9 28 TOW truck towing 6 ok ok ak se ee ew 6 11 Towing load specification 9 19 Trailer towing ga a8 oe a we He es 9 16 Transceiver HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 54 Transmission Driving with automatic transmission 5 13 Selector lever lock release 5 16 Travel See registering your vehicle in another COUN ic a sce Maltin a a yds Bot Bs me 9 9 THD OGOMEIE bet ee a ee a ae ww a 2 4 Turn signal switch 4 2 29 U Uniform tire quality grading 9 29 V Vanity ION s s i ca aa i a Hy Lae ray a 3 26 Variable voltage control system 8 15 Vehicle dimensions and weights 9 8 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 32 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system 5 51 Vehicle electronic system
41. cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water Use a damp soft cloth when cleaning the Mobile Entertainment System com ponents Do not use solvents or clean ing solutions Do not attempt to use the system in extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C or above 158 F 70 C To avoid discharging the vehicle battery do not operate the system more than 15 minutes without starting the engine Movies will not be shown on the front display while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce driver distraction Audio is available when a movie is played To view movies in the front display stop the vehicle in a safe location move the shift selector to the P Park position and apply the parking brake Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 55 1 2 3 EJECT button DVD slot Auxiliary input jacks DIGITAL VIDEO DISC DVD PLAYER CONTROLS 1 amp EJECT button When the amp button is pressed with the DVD loaded it will be ejected The display will show the eject symbol in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds once the amp button is pressed If the DVD is not loaded the display will show NO DISC If the DVD comes out and is not removed within 25 seconds it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it DVD slot Insert a DVD into the slot with the label side facing up The DVD will be guided automati cally into
42. headlights Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument brightness control operates when control switch is in or AUTO position with auto the headlight the z Dd z ZO lights activated Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru ment panel lights when driving at night TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal Q Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction When the turn is com pleted the turn signals cancel automatically Lane change signal 2 To signala lane change move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash but the lever does not latch FOG LIGHT SWITCH To turn the fog lights on turn the headlight switch to the 2 position then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position the headlights must be on then turn the fog light switch to the 0 posi tion To turn the fog lights off turn the fog light switch to the OFF position The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi tions All turn signal lights flash A WARNING If stopping for an emerge
43. oil temperature and drain time Use these specifications for reference only Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine Start the engine Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter Correct as re quired Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level with the dipstick Add engine oil if necessary CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 2 Turn the engine off 3 Place alarge drain pan under the oil filter 4 Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 5 Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag A CAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage 6 Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil 7 Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional 2 3 turn 8 Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter Correct as required 9 Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level Add engine oil if necessary 5 SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID When checking or replacement is required we rec
44. radio mode or when playing a DVD or CD ANTENNA Window antenna The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear passenger and driver side windows A CAUTION Do not place metalized film near the rear driver or passenger side window glass or attach any metal parts to it This may cause poor reception or noise When cleaning the inside of the rear driver or passenger side window be careful not to scratch or damage the window antenna Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth 4 54 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems INFINITI MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM MES if so equipped This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI Mobile Entertainment System which enables you to play a Digital Versatile Disc DVD providing the im ages and sounds both in the front and rear dis play screens AWARNING The driver must not attempt to operate or view the Mobile Entertainment Sys tem while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to ve hicle operation Do not attempt to modify the system to display a movie on the front screen while the vehicle is being driven Doing so may distract the driver and may cause a collision and serious personal injury or death A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer
45. section of this manual For detailed information see Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre vent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip pery surfaces Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down De press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will oper ate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles A WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping distances Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 6 MPH 5 10 km h The speed varies according to road conditions When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However t
46. sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead e Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur For the vehicle to vehicle distance control mode see the following description For the conven tional fixed speed cruise control mode see Conventional fixed speed cruise control mode later in this section VEHICLE TO VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE In the vehicle to vehicle distance control mode the Intelligent Cruise Control ICC system auto matically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you according to that vehicle s speed up to the set speed or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear With ICC the driver can maintain the same speed as other vehicles without the constant need to adjust the speed as you would with a normal cruise control system PRECAUTIONS ON VEHICLE TO VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE The system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following another vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction If the distance sensor 1 detects a slower mov ing vehicle ahead of you the system will reduce your speed so that you follow the vehicle in front of you at the selected distance The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes up to 25 of vehicle braking power if necessary The detection range of the sensor is approxi mately 390 ft 1
47. test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual 2 14 Instruments and controls Operation The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways Malfunction indicator light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected Check the fuel filler cap If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The Sit light should turn off after a few driving trips If the ENGINE light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Malfunction indicator light blinking An en gine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system To re duce or avoid emission control system dam age do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH 72 km h avoid hard acceleration or deceleration avoid steep uphill grades if possible reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and come on steady Have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer A CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel economy and possible damage to the emission con trol system
48. the door can be opened only from the outside INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communi cation systems Do not operate the In telligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unin tentionally when the unit is stored for a flight The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse The operating environment and or conditions may af fect the Intelligent Key system operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system A CAUTION Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intel ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions When operating near a location where st
49. the horn beep feature can be deacti If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened vated using the Intelligent Key you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 1 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds The panic alarm stops when It has run for 25 seconds or Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 NOTE If you change the horn beep and light flash feature with the keyfob the display screen if so equipped will not show the current mode and cannot be used to change the mode Use the keyfob to return to the pre vious mode and re enable the display screen control To deactivate Press and hold the and B buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and if buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and out
50. 25 INFINITI Intelligent Key 2 0 00 cece eee eee 8 26 PIGMiS o2a actus ea E E ee eseusamseeceeceesene 8 27 PICACIIGNIS 2 cccugeqecuecadenupawesud e ecw 8 27 Exterior and interior lights 05 8 28 Wheels and tires lt vccendnds Shoueetabadaw bees a wees 8 32 Tire PrESSUPGt cui icsdeeatenetecsecehaveneecde 8 32 Tire labeling si s22522 5085225202242562506 240886 8 35 Types ol MeS nota are teem cee E REAN 8 38 Tre Chd serseri raaa ETE es 8 39 Changing wheels and tires 0 cece eee eee 8 39 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your new INFINITI has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with long service intervals to save you both time and money However some day to day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your INFINI TI s good mechanical condition as well as its emission and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance as well as general maintenance Is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance You are a vital link in the mainte nance chain Scheduled maintenance For your convenience both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your INFINITI at regular intervals General ma
51. 3 XXX t Example 4 2 TIN Tire Identification Number for a new tire example DOT XX XX XXX XXXX 1 DOT Abbreviation for the Depart ment Of Transportation The symbol can be placed above below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number 2 Two digit code identification mark Manufacturer s 3 Two digit code Tire size 4 XXX XXXX t t 5 6 WDI0396 Three digit code Tire type code Optional Three digit code Date of Manufac ture Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For ex ample the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003 If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire 3 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufactur ers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others 4 Maximum permissible inflation pres sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible in flation pressure Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car ried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in stalled tire Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire require
52. 4 24 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 204 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 10 2 Checking engine coolant level 8 7 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Corrosion protection ooo 7 5 Cruise control a s as ws ea dodam a eaa 5 17 Cup holders naaa 0 0002 eee 2 40 Curtain side impact and rollover air bag D Daytime running light system Canada only ova aaa aa 2 28 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWO 6 as amp ea a a a ne A E A 2 24 Digital video disc DVD 4 54 Dimensions and weights 9 8 Dimmer switch for instrument panel 2 28 Display controls see control panel buttons 4 2 Distance to empty 62 ee ee ee 4 7 Door locks 6 42 0 sarea tedoee oe ees 3 4 Drive belt 2 0 002202 8 15 Drive positioner Automatic 3 29 Driving Cold weather driving 5 54 Driving with automatic transmission 5 13 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 E Economy Well 24 2 a4 4 6 es ga we ae 5 40 Emission control information label 9 10 Emission control system warranty 9 30 Engine Before starting the engine 5 11 Block heater o as 4 0 tee a ows 5 56 Capacities and recommended fuellubricantS oe s a io tase he we 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 8 Changing engine oil 8 9 Changing engine oilfilter 8 10 Che
53. 66 Precautions on supplemental restraint SvSIEM 265 e488 me 2 SS Siw a a 1 52 Supplemental restraint system Supplemental airbag system 1 52 Switch Autolight switch a 22 2 a se ee es 2 26 Automatic power window switch 2 49 FOG MOnESWHCs so oasa i Sdn a 2 29 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 29 Headlight aiming control aaa aaa 2 27 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 24 Headlight control switch 2 25 Ignition switch ee eo ae ew we He 5 9 Power door lock switch 3 5 Rear sonar system off switch 2 32 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWICK 45 a de ee Gb ood a oe oe 2 24 Rear window wiper and washer switches 2 23 Turn signal switch 2 29 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 32 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 22 T TaGhOMe ter 2 a4 weed oan ds HRM ww 2 5 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 10 Theft INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 21 3 3 5 11 Third row power folding seats 1 18 Three way catalyst aooo 5 2 Tilting steering wheel 3 24 Tire Rab TO s a a e a a a ee oe i 6 2 Sparetie 2 2 0008 6 3 Tire and Loading Information label 9 11 Tie CHAINS 2 ca dc Hee we be eS ox 8 39 Tire placard 2a uc ute bees tawes f 9 11 Tire pressure
54. Activating Alternate Command Mode 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Highlight the Others key on the display and then press the ENTER button 3 Highlight the Voice Recognition key and then press the ENTER button Settings gt Voice Recognition ep eceade E Alternate Command Mode 5 ae Sl o a i Displays the commands of voice recognition key and press the ENTER button Command Mode 4 94 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Highlight the Alternate Command Mode The confirmation message is displayed on the screen Select the OK key and press the ENTER button to activate the Alternate Settings gt Voice Recognition lI Elf commesue Gf SSC i a El atest command nose e00 nimi voice resasa 60w i 6 Alternate Command Mode is activated and the setting menu is expanded to include the Alternate Command Mode options See Settings menu later in this section for an explanation of the options Displaying the command list If you are controlling the system by voice com mands for the first time or do not know the appropriate voice command perform the follow ing procedure for displaying the voice command list available only in Alternate Command Mode Press the C4 switch listen for the tone and say Help The system will respond by display ing the command list main menu meee Information gt Command List 3 In
55. C e Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet e Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers If an Intelligent key is lost or stolen INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent key This will prevent the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle For information re garding the erasing procedure please contact a INFINITI dealer Sy SPA1951 Mechanical key The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key which can be used in case of a discharged bat tery To remove the mechanical key release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key To install the mechanical key firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position The mechanical key can be used for operation in the same way as an ordinary key A CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot See Doors in this section and Storage in the Instruments and Controls section of this manual Valet hand off When you have to leave a key with a valet give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me chanical key with you to protect your belongings To prevent the glove box or console box from being opened during valet hand off follow the procedure below 1 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli ge
56. For example towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating The engine protection mode which helps reduce the chance of engine damage could activate and automati cally decrease engine power Vehicle speed may decrease under high load Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load weather and road conditions AWARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a col lision Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of the road ina safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by INFINITI warranties Total trailer load Tongue load Tongue load x 100 10 to 15 Total trailer load Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib uting hitch keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu facturer The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow ing Towing Load Specification chart If the tongue load becomes excessive re
57. Free Space Information about Saved Albums Saved Tracks and Remaining Time is displayed Mood Categories Number of saved tracks and their catego ries Relaxing Music Lively Music Slow Music Upbeat Music and Others are displayed Deleted Items Information about the deleted tracks is displayed Search Missing Titles If titles are not displayed for CDs that have been recorded titles can be ac quired using one of the following meth ods Retrieve from HDD Searches the title using the database in the hard drive Retrieve from CF Searches the title from the information acquired on the Internet Transfer Missing Titles to CF Transfers the information of the album recorded without titles to a Compact Flash card Visit www InfinitiUSA com music update for details Music Box Settings For information see Music Box settings later in this section CDDB Version The version of the built in Gracenote Database is displayed Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Track XAXXXXX Album XXXXXXX Music Box text display While listening to a track in the Music Box audio system you can view certain text Touch the Text key to display the following information for each item e Set Mood Set the mood category of the track to Re laxing Music Lively Music Slow Music or Upbeat Music e Delete Track Delete the track being played e Edit Info
58. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 49 CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES Copyright Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technol ogy and related content delivery For more infor mation visit www gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2006 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2006 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 7783 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pend ing Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trade marks of Gracenote CD CF CompactFlash CARE AND CLEANING CD Handle a CD by its edges Do not bend the disc Never
59. GREEN Vehicle stop lamp switch to trailer brake controller BLACK Brake controller ground Gr BROWN WHITE Trailer brake controller switched output RED BLUE Trailer brake controller illumination RED Fused trailer brake con troller battery feed B Peel off the tape and connect the jumper harness to the connector Release the parking brake Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller according to the manufacturer s instructions Pre towing tips Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and or unloaded trailer is hitched Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose up or nose down condition check for improper tongue load overload worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low Load the trailer so approximately 60 of the trailer load is in the front half and 40 is in the back half Also make sure the load is balanced side to side Check your hitch trailer tire pressure ve hicle tire pressure trailer light operation and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal state or local regulations If not install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle Technica
60. Hands Free Phone System later in this section When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will discharge the battery and the engine will not start Reference symbols ENTER button This is a button on the control panel Display key This is a select key on the screen By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function HOW TO USE THE INFINITI CONTROLLER Use the INFINITI controller to choose an item on the display screen Select an item on the display using the main directional buttons certain Navigation System functions use the additional directional buttons or the center dial Then press the ENTER button C to select the item or perform the action The BACK button 4 has two functions e Go back to the previous display cancel If you press the BACK button during setup the setup will be canceled and or the display will return to the previous screen Finish setup In some screens pressing the BACK button accepts the changes made during setup For the VOICE button functions refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual HOW TO USE THE TOUCH SCREEN A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contai
61. Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone num bers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the system will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the system will then ask for the last four digits Say six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor mance NOTE When speaking a house number speak the number 0 as zero or oh If the letter O is included in the house number it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero 4 86 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Standard Mode command list Category Command COMMAND ACTION Phone Displays Phone function commands Information Displays Vehicle Information Help Displays User Guide Navigation Command COMMAND ACTION Searches for a location by the street address specified and sets a route for continental US and Canada only Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location Displays Navigation function commands Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination Phone Command COMMAND ACTION Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits Ch
62. OFF Switch Turn the ICC system back on to use the system CRUISE Wd Ihe a ZIRAS Condition B When the sensor window is dirty making it im possible to detect a vehicle ahead the ICC sys tem is automatically canceled The chime sounds and the system warning light Orange will come on in the instrument panel and the set distance indicators will blink in the vehicle information display Action to take If the warning light comes on park the vehicle in a safe place turn the engine off Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth and then perform the settings again Starting and driving 5 33 CRUISE Condition C When the ICC system is not operating properly the chime sounds and the orange system warn ing light will illuminate in the instrument panel Action to take If the warning light comes on park the vehicle in a safe place Turn the engine off and then perform the settings again 5 34 Starting and driving If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning Although the ve hicle is still driveable under normal condi tions have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer Sensor maintenance The sensor for the ICC system 4 is located below the front bumper To keep the ICC system operating properly be sure to observe the following Always keep the sensor clean Do not use alcohol benzine or thin
63. ON direction 3 Turn the ignition switch toward the LOCK position The shift selector can be moved from the P Park position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC although it does not show on the lock cylinder When the ignition switch is in the OFF position the steering wheel is not locked In order for the steering wheel to be locked it must be turned about 1 6 of a turn counterclock wise from the straight up position To lock the steering wheel turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To unlock the steering wheel push the ignition switch in and turn it gently while rotating the steer ing wheel slightly right and left If the battery of the vehicle equipped with the Intelligent Key system is discharged the ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK position even using the me chanical key IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS Push in the ignition switch to the position when you turn it LOCK Normal parking position The ignition switch can only be locked in the LOCK position The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed in and turned to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key ACC Accessories This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running ON Normal operating position This position turns on the ignition sys
64. ON will display Press and hold the REAR CTRL button again to turn the rear display screen off Rear Display OFF will display If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear display screen the display will show Rear Con trols Not Available A na SPEAKER CONTROL button Press the i button to turn the rear speakers off and the headphones on Press this button again to turn rear seat speakers back on and the headphones off 4 CD EJECT button Whenthe amp button is pressed with the com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected When the amp button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off AUX jack The AUX jack 4 is located below the air condi tioner controls The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape player MP3 player or a laptop computer Press the DISC AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX jack COMPACTFLASH CF PLAYER OPERATION Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and insert a CF card into the Com pactFlash player slot 2 Then press the DISC AUX button repeatedly to switch to the CompactFlash mode If the system has been turned off while the Com pactFlash card was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the Com pactFlash card DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button i
65. REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER Rear seat temperature and fan speed can be controlled from both the front seat overhead con sole controls A or the rear seat overhead con sole controls Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer control of the rear climate functions to the rear passen gers To operate the rear air conditioner the engine must be running If the rear seat fan control dial is set to 0 the air conditioner is turned off If it is set to any of the fan speed positions air is discharged from the rear vents at the corresponding speed 1 Rear fan speed control dial 2 Rear airflow mode buttons 3 Rear temperature control dial CONTROLS Fan control dial The fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on and off and controls fan speed Airflow mode buttons The airflow mode buttons select where the air flow is directed from Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows rear passen gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioner system in your INFINITI ve hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth s ozone layer Special charging equipment and lubricant is re quired when servicing your INFINITI air condi tioner Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system See Air conditioner system refrigerant a
66. SSCS GR Change Number Phonebook a T International Call Say the entire number or groups of numbers Say the next three digits Dial or Say Change Number LSU0018 4 Say Dial Number 5 Say 800 6 The system announces Please say the next three digits or dial or say change number 7 Say 662 4 90 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems You can only say a phone number using the 3 3 4 grouping 7 digits and 10 digits using Voice Recognition gt Dial Number de Voice Recognition gt Dial Number this command Please use the International Call command for all other formats and E 80 0662 Er 800 662 6200 when special characters such as star pound and plus need to be entered Change Number w Change Number f you say Change Number during phone number entry the system will automatically request that you repeat the number using Say the last four digits or Say Change Number the 3 3 4 format In this case please say the area code first and then follow the prompts To exit hold the TALK switch To exit hold the TALK switch Do not add a 1 in front of the area code when speaking phone numbers lf the system does not recognize your com 8 The system announces Please say the last 10 The system announces Dial or Change mand please try repeating the command four digits o
67. To tilt the moonroof down push the tilt switch toward the down position 2 Restarting the moonroof sliding switch The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected the electri cal supply interrupted and or some abnormality detected Use the following reset procedure to return moonroof operation to normal 1 If the moonroof lid is open push the tilting switch repeatedly toward the down position 2 to fully close the lid 2 Push and hold the tilting switch for more than 2 seconds toward the down position 2 to reestablish the lid s home position The moonroof should now operate normally Auto reverse function when closing or tilting down the moonroof The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front t
68. Ve hicle is still driveable under normal condi tions have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer Sensor maintenance The sensor for the Preview Function is common with Intelligent Cruise Control and is located below the front bumper To keep the Preview Function operating properly be sure to observe the following Always keep the sensor clean Wipe with a soft cloth carefully so as not to damage them Do not impact the areas around the sensor Do not touch or disassemble the screw lo cated on the sensor Doing so could cause failure or malfunction If the sensor installa tion part is deformed due to an accident contact an INFINITI dealer Do not attach a sticker including transpar ent material or install an accessory near the sensor This could cause failure or malfunc tion 5 40 Starting and driving BREAK IN SCHEDULE A CAUTION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short ened engine life and reduced engine performance Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed either fast or slow and do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Avoid quick starts Avoid hard braking as much as possible Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Your
69. a registered cellular phone from the paired list e Paired Phone List Up to 5 registered cellular phones are shown on the list If you select a cellular phone that is different from the one currently being connected the newly selected phone will be connected to the system e Edit Phone Name If you would like to change the way your phone s name is displayed select this key a character input screen will be displayed Settings gt Volume and Beeps i R Guidance voice ON E Ringer vol cMMMLe l i incoming cau SOMMS E Z Outgoing Call Olle Pee on I Po 6 6 DOWN Y 6 DOWN Po 6 6 DOWN Y 4 Beep when a button is pushed CALL VOLUME Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve clarity if reception between callers is unclear Incoming call adjusting this setting allows you to hear a difference in volume Outgoing call adjusting this setting allows the person you are talking with to hear a difference in volume To access the settings press the SETTING but ton then highlight Volume and Beeps using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button You can also adjust the volume of an incoming voice during a call by pushing the volume control switch on the steering wheel or by turning the volume control knob on the instrument panel Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 81 INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM INFINITI Voice Recognit
70. adjustments 3 27 AWARNING Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear Be careful when moving to the right Using only this mirror could cause an accident Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects e Do not adjust the mirrors while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident 3 28 Pre driving checks and adjustments a cS Power folding outside mirrors LPD0417 A CAUTION Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors Push the switch to open or close the mirrors Automatic anti glare outside mirror Driver s side only The outside mirror will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles The automatic anti glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position The automatic anti glare feature will be on when starting the vehicle The indicator light on the automatic anti glare rearview mirror will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operat ing To turn off the anti glare feature press the button on the rearview mirror The indicator light will turn off To turn on the anti glare feature again press the button on the rearview mirror The in dicator light will turn on For information on the automatic anti glare rear vie
71. all tires including the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be needed For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Have a dam aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when per forming periodic maintenance cleaning the ve hicle etc Additional information on the following items with an is found later in this sec tion Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort Keep the floor mat away
72. and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual DRINKING ALCOHOL DRUGS AND DRIVING AWARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs Alcohol in the bloodstream re duces coordination delays reaction time and impairs judgement Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others Additionally if you are injured in an accident alcohol can increase the severity of the injury INFINITI is committed to safe driving However you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents Al though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol Remember drinking and driving don t mix And that is true for drugs too over the counter pre scription and illegal drugs Don t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco hol drugs or some other physical condition DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Your INFINITI is designed for both normal and off road use However avoid driving in deep wa ter or mud as your INFINITI is mainly designed for leisure use unlike a conventional off road ve hicle Remember that two
73. and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING The use of tires other than those recom mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construction bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling ground clearance body to tire clearance tire chain clearance speedometer calibration headlight aim and bumper height Some of these ef fects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires install the new tires on the rear axle Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an acci dent and personal injury If the wheels are changed for any rea son always replace with wheels which have the same off set dimension Wheels of a different off set could cause premature tire wear degrade ve hicle handling characteristics and or interference with the brake discs drums Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and or early brake pad shoe wear Re fer to Wheels and tires in the Techni cal and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off set dimensions When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light w
74. and maintain the speed for 20 seconds 6 Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times 7 Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH 88 km h and maintain the speed for at least 3 min utes 8 Stop the vehicle Place the transmission se lector lever in the P Park or N Neutral position 9 Turn the engine off 10 Repeat steps 1 8 at least one more time If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted repeat the preceding step Any safe driving mode is accept able between steps Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed Technical and consumer information 9 31 EVENT DATA RECORDERS EDR This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understand ing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling Sounds are not recorded These data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances
75. apply emergency braking by sensing a vehicle ahead in the same lane and the distance and relative speed from it it applies the brake pre pressure before the driver depresses the brake pedal and helps improve brake response by re ducing pedal free play 5 38 Starting and driving This system will not operate when the ve hicle is moving at approximately 20 MPH 32 km h or less The pre pressure function ceases when the following conditions are met a When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal b If the driver does not operate the accelerator or brake pedal within approximately 1 second The sensor will not detect a Pedestrians or objects in the roadway b Oncoming vehicles in the same lane c Motorcycles or scooters traveling offset in the travel lane as illustrated AWARNING The Preview Function is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device Although the brake operation is controlled by the system it does not automatically decel erate the vehicle speed It is the driver s responsibility to stay alert drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times As there is a performance limit to the Preview Function never rely solely on this system This system does not cor rect careless inattentive or absent minded driving or overcome poor vis ibility in rain fog or other bad weather Reduce the vehicle speed by depress
76. are general precau tions which should be closely observed AWARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface ap ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving Move the shift selector to P Park Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs Your vehicle is equipped with an auto matic engine cooling fan It may come on at any time without warning even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running To avoid injury always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan If you must work with the engine run ning keep your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehicle Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle If you must run the engine in an en closed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack If it is neces sary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery On gasoline engine models the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by an INFINITI dealer because
77. automatically Air flow distribution fan speed and A C on off are also controlled automatically A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a mal function Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Push the defroster control button Y to turn the system on The display will show the defrost icon 2 Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows press and hold the SS but ton to set the fan speed to maximum e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean push the AUTO button to return to the auto mode When the DEF control SY is activated the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36 F 2 C If in defrost mode for more than one minute the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control is turned OFF the vehicle is shut off or the A C button is used to turn off the compressor even if an air flow MODE button other than is selected This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The air recirculation mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control buttons Press the fan speed control buttons to manually control the fan speed
78. backfires you could be burned Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed Doing so could result in serious injury IN CABIN MICROFILTER The in cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors The filter is located behind the glove box Refer to the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals To replace the filter perform the following proce dure 1 Remove the 2 lower glove box screws Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 p 4 2 Open the glove box then remove the three 3 Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the NOTE upper glove box screws Remove the glove filter Cover box assembly from the instrument panel to access the in cabin microfilter cover The filters are marked with air flow arrows The end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle The arrows should face downward 4 Insert the first filter into the housing and slide it over to the right Insert the second filter into the housing 5 Replace the filter cover 6 Install the glove box assembly 7 Fill out the date information on the small replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid 8 18 Maintenance and do it yourself WINDSHIELD WI
79. belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 6 After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted the ALR mode child restraint mode is canceled FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint WRS0799 WRS0800 Follow these steps to install a forward facing Forward facing Websmounted step 2 Forward facing rigid mounted step 2 child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach If the seating position does not have an adjust LATCH system ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check able head restraint and it is interfering with the to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop proper child restraint fit try another seating posi 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Al erly attached to the lower anchors tion or a different child restraint ways follow the child restraint manufactur ers inciniciions 3 The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit See Head restraint adjustment in this section for head restraint ad justment information 1 42 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO671 Forward facing step 4 4 For child restraints that are equipped with webb
80. brake 4 ON OFF switch 2 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE aa CONTROL 3 Firmly d th king brake pedal and it ei i a ae lf the cruise control system malfunctions it 7 cancels automatically The SET indicator 4 Before driving be sure the brake warning light in the vehicle information display then light goes out blinks to warn the driver see Vehicle infor mation display in the Instruments and con trols section Starting and driving 5 17 f the SET indicator light blinks turn the cruise control switch off and have the sys tem checked by an INFINITI dealer The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL RES COAST SET or CANCEL switch located on the steering wheel To properly set the cruise control system use the following pro cedures AWARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions e When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed On winding or hilly roads On slippery roads rain snow ice etc In very windy areas Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident 5 18 Starting and driving CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be tween 25 89 MPH 40 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
81. button to enable that time zone indicator light will illumi nate for that location Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic Newfoundland Hawaii Alaska After selection settings press the BACK button or any other mode button to accept the changes 4 14 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Comfort amp Conv 8 00 Gaacx renon eo Bi Auto Headlights Sensitivity is a B Auto Headlights Off Delay O 45s Ei Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Remote xey Response Horn OND 1 14 DOWN i Cabin lighting when unlocking doors Comfort amp Convenience settings Select the Comfort amp Conv key by using the INFINITI controller and pressing the ENTER but ton The comfort and convenience option screen will be displayed You can set the following operating conditions by selecting the desired item using the INFINITI controller then pressing the ENTER button The indicator light box at the right of the selected item alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER button is pressed Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF PA Auto Re Lock Time O Gmn OR 2 Selective Door Unlock Beep 6 14 DOWN i Flash lights with remote key lock unlock Intelligent Key Lock Uniock Intelligent Key Lock Reply Mina tit tet ust tr fs Remote Key Response Lights ON i
82. car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law AWARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading ei ther separately or in combination can cause heat build up and possible tire failure Technical and consumer information 9 29 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your INFINITI is covered by the following emis sion warranties For USA 1 Emission Defects Warranty 2 Emissions Performance Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor mation Booklet which comes with your INFINITI If you did not receive a Warranty Information Book let or it is lost you may obtain a replacement by writing to INFINITI Division Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 9 30 Technical and consumer information For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor mation Booklet which comes with your INFINITI If you did not receive a Warranty Information Book let or it is lost you may obtain a replacement by writing to Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Onta
83. cause unconsciousness or death 5 2 Starting and driving If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all win dows fully open and have the vehicle inspected immediately Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time Keep the lift gate and rear vent windows closed while driving otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passen ger compartment If you must drive with the lift gate or rear vent windows open follow these precautions 1 Open all the windows 2 Set the air recirculation but ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air If electrical wiring or other cable con nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the lift gate or the body follow the manufacturer s recommen dation to prevent carbon monoxide en try into the vehicle The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever a The vehicle is raised for service b You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment c You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system d You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system un derbody or rear of the vehicle THREE WAY CATALYST The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system Exhaust gases in the three way c
84. consumer information A CAUTION Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage Whenever flat towing your vehicle al ways tow forward never backward e DO NOT tow any automatic transmis sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground flat towing Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by INFINITI in the In case of emergency section of this manual Automatic Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle s drive wheels Always follow the dolly manufacturer s recommendations when using their product SNOW PLOW AWARNING Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing Installing a snowplow may affect vehicle handling This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT Department of Transportation Quality Grades All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
85. contains important information concerning the following systems Driver and passenger supplemental front impact air bag INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag Roof mounted curtain side impact and roll over supplemental air bag Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front impact air bag system The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions The supplemental side air bag is de signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact or roll over collisions In a side impact the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted In a rollover both curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time These supplemental restraint systems are de signed to supplement the crash protection pro vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute for them Seat belts should always be corr
86. defects US only 9 30 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 9 31 Event Data Recorders EDR 0 c0eeeeeees 9 32 Owner s Manual Service Manual order information 9 32 In the event of a collision 2 9 33 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities The actual refill capacities may be slightly different When refilling follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Capacity Approximate Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure Imp measure Liter Fuel 28 gal 23 1 4 gal 105 8 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI RON 91 1 Engine oil 7 Drain and Refill With oil filter change 6 7 8 qt 0 3 4 qt 6 5 Engine oil with API Certification Mark 2 Without oil filter change 6 1 2 qt 5 1 2 qt 6 2 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 2 Cooling system With reservoir 3 3 4 gal 3 1 8 gal 14 4 50 Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant or equivalent 50 Demineralized or distilled water Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF 3 Power steering fluid PSF the Maintenance and do it yourself section Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent 4 Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 5 or equivalent DOT 3 Multi purpose grease NLGI No 2 Lithium Soap base Air condition
87. dimensions and weights 9 8 Wheels andtires 4 8 32 Wheel lire size aa 646k we Baw ew eee 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country a 6 4 6 ex we ee ew 9 9 Window washer fluid 8 12 Windows Locking passengers windows 2 48 Power rear windows 2 49 Power vent windows 2 50 Power windows 02 2 47 Rear power windows 2 49 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 22 Wiper Rear window wiper and washer SWICHCS amp a s aa koea oe Ak oe e 2 23 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 22 Wiper blades 8 19 10 7 GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL INFINITI recommends the use of premium un leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI Anti Knock Index number Research octane number 96 If unleaded premium gaso line is not available you may use unleaded regu lar gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number Research octane number 91 but you may notice a decrease in performance A CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can
88. door lock 3 6 Door locks sa c ed ee ead dk we 3 4 Glove box lock 2 37 Lift gate release onua aaa 3 22 Power door locks noaa aaa 3 5 Low fuel warning light 2 11 2 12 2 19 Low tire pressure warning light 2 11 Low washer fluid warning light aa aa 2 19 Luggage hook n noaoae 2 44 Luggage rack see roof rack 2 46 Luggage See vehicle loading information 9 12 Luggage storage see vehicle loading information 2 43 M Maintenance Changing the maintenance interval 4 9 Displaying the maintenance notice reminder 2 2 sow aeon 6 a 4 10 General maintenance 8 2 Inside the vehicle 8 3 Maintenance precautions 8 5 Outside the vehicle 8 2 Resetting the maintenance interval 4 10 Seat belt maintenance 1 29 SGIM 16 ties Rhbea pee oe we d 4 9 Under the hood and vehicle 8 4 Malfunction indicator light 2 14 Map lighis s a4 a0 Wate O48 6 ok a eee 2 54 Map pocket 22 5008 2 38 Meters and gauges 4 2 3 Instrument brightness control 2 28 Mirror Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 27 Outside mirror control 3 27 Outside mirrors 2 2 aa 3 27 Vanity MINOF s 4 ab am a nawra aa 3 26 MIGOMIOOI s s ea woe beste a ke ae We See a 2 50 Music Box hard disk drive audio system 4 41 O Octane rating See fuel octane
89. essary to work under the vehicle sup port it with safety stands e Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change e Use the correct jack up points Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary Never use blocks on or under the jack Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack It may cause the vehicle to move This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack Never run the engine with a wheel s off the ground It may cause the vehicle to move Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc tions 1 Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground NOTE Before jacking up the vehicle make sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the vehicle is lifted up with the ignition switch placed in the ON position the auto leveling suspension will become disabled after 60 seconds To reset the auto level
90. ger s side Before operating the 3rd row seats Make sure the 2nd row seatback isn t re clined Lower the 3rd row headrest to the full down position 1 18 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Disconnect and secure the center seat belt and tongues into the retractor base See Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt later in this section Always reconnect the center seat belt when the seat is returned to the upright position Make sure that there are no objects on the seatback cushion A CAUTION Make sure the seat s is returned to the full upright position before a passenger sits in the seat s When folding or returning the seat s to the upright position to avoid injury to yourself and others Make sure that the seat path is clear before moving the seat Be careful not to allow hands or feet to get caught or pinched in the seat To fold down the 3rd row seats push and hold the bottom portion of the switch To raise the 3rd row seats push and hold the top portion of the switch A chime will sound three times to indicate the start of the operation A warning beep will sound 5 times if the seat isn t in the full upright or folded position when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position If the warning beep is still present after one complete cycle and if the seats are in the full upright or folded position bring your vehicle in for service
91. gt Settings gt Phone 8 es Downloaded Phonebook Automatic Hold 09 ak gr ly Phonebook a Use Vehicle Ringtone z Delete Call Logs Bluetooth Setup 1 6 Add or edit phonebook entries i Add or manage Bluetooth phones Use Vehicle Ringtone Delete Call Logs A e TA ee tps iy PHONE SETTING e Download All Download all of the contacts registered in To set up the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone the Bluetooth cellular phone Availability of System to your preferred settings press the SET this function depends on each cellular UNG DuMoN on the instrument panel and select phone The memory downloading procedure the Phone key on the display then press the from the cellular phone also varies according ENTER button to each cellular phone See your cellular Phonebook phone Owner s Manual for more details See Phonebook earlier in this section for add Delete Downloaded Phonebook ing editing and deleting a contact Delete all of the downloaded phonebook Downloaded Phonebook entries See the following information for each item Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 79 Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone book Delete a single entry from the downloaded phonebook Touch the corresponding letter key then touch the name key you wish to delete Touch the Yes key to delete the entry Automatic Hold If this item is turned on an incoming call wil
92. gt TRACK fast forward button for more than approximately 1 5 seconds the CF card will play while rewinding or fast forwarding Whenthe SEEK CAT rewind button orthe gt TRACK fast forward button is released the CF card will return to the normal playing speed The INFINITI controller can also be used to select tracks when the CF card is being played For more information on how to use the INFINITI controller see How to use the INFINITI control ler earlier in this section Folder selection To change to another folder in the CF card either Turn the TUNE FLDR knob right or left Touch the desired folder key on screen Use the INFINITI controller SCAN RPT button Pressing the SCAN RPT button while the CF card is playing changes the play pattern as fol lows 1 CF CARD RPT 1 FOLDER RPT 1 TRK RPT 1 CF CARD RDM 1 FOLDER RDM 1 CF CARD RPT 1 CF CARD RPT the entire CF card will be repeated 1 FOLDER RPT the folder currently being ac cessed will be repeated 1 TRK RPT the current track playing will be repeated 1 CF CARD RDM all the tracks on the CF card will be played randomly 1 FOLDER RDM the tracks in the current folder being accessed will be played randomly CF eject Press the knob next to the CF slot while a CF card Is inserted to eject the CF card Troubleshooting messages The following messages will be displayed under certain conditions Reading Co
93. in 4WD Blinks slowly wheel rotation is can large The 4WD warning light is located in the meter The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni tion switch is placed in the ON position It turns off soon after the engine is started If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the ignition switch is ON the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink If the 4WD warning light comes on the 4WD shift indicator light goes out High temperature transfer case oil makes the warning light blink rapidly about twice per sec ond If the warning light blinks rapidly during operation stop the vehicle in a safe place imme diately Then if the light goes off after a while you can continue driving A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the warning light blink slowly about once per two seconds Change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive fast A CAUTION If the warning light comes on or blinks slowly during operation or rapidly after stopping the vehicle for a while have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not recommended when the 4WD warning light turns on When the warning light comes on the 2WD mode may be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H Be especially careful when driving If corre sponding parts are malfunctioning the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the 4WD
94. in a sudden stop or collision The child restraint must be used and installed properly Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Infants and children should never be held on anyone s lap In a collision or sudden braking the child could be crushed between the adult and the vehicle Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger INFINITI recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front seat see Child restraint installation using the seat belts later in this section Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An inflating air bag could seri ously injure or kill a child A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat 1 32 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses
95. in the middle of the gauge when the engine is running A CAUTION This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level Use the dipstick to check the oil level See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section o If the gauge reading does not move with the proper amount of engine oil have the vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine VOLTMETER When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the voltmeter indicates the battery volt age When the engine is running it indicates the generator voltage While cranking the engine the volts drop below the normal range If the reading is not in the normal range 11 15 volts while the engine is running it may indicate that the charging sys tem is not functioning properly Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer Instruments and controls 2 7 WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS 5 ABS or Anti lock Braking System AWD warning light CI O High beam indicator light Blue ABS warning light AT Automatic transmission check warning light Low fuel warning light SERVICE Malfunction indicator light MIL ECK SOON O I Automatic transmission park warning light Low tire pressure warning light Security indicator light CCJ model ATP m BRAKE or O Brake warning light Master warning light SLIP Slip indicat
96. ing the brake pedal in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions The Preview Function may not operate properly under the follow ing conditions The vehicle is still drive able under normal conditions and the Brake Assist will operate When rain snow or dirt adhere to the system sensor When strong light for example at sunrise or sunset is directly shining on the front of the vehicle Winding or hilly roads may cause the sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may de tect objects or vehicles in other lanes Vehicle position in the lane may cause the sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may detect objects or vehicles in other lanes When the Preview Function operates the brake pedal may move slightly and may make a small noise This is not a system malfunction CRUISE Warning light and display When the Preview Function is not operating properly the chime sounds and the orange sys tem warning light will illuminate in the instrument panel Action to take If the warning light comes on park the vehicle in a safe place Turn the engine off restart the engine and resume driving Starting and driving 5 39 If the indicator stays on it may indicate that the Preview Function is malfunctioning the brake is operative Although the
97. lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked When the button is pushed with all doors locked the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re minder that the doors are already locked The horn may or may not beep Refer to Comfort amp Convenience settings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section Confirm that the gt indicator light comes on The S light stays on for about 30 seconds The vehicle security system is now pre armed After about 30 seconds the ve hicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase The cA light begins to flash once every 3 seconds If during the 30 second pre arm time period the driver s door is unlocked by the mechanical key a request switch the Intelligent Key or if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position the system will not arm If the key is turned slowly when locking the driver s door the system may not arm Furthermore if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key the system may be disarmed when the key is removed If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds unlock the door once and lock it again Even when the driver and or passen gers are in the vehicle the system will arm with all doors closed and locked with the ignition switch in the OFF po sition Vehicle security system activa
98. may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2 wheel dynamometer such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unex pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or per sonal injury position on dry hard surface roads Driv ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise tire wear and increased fuel consumption If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads inthe 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the automatic transmission shift selector to the N position and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking Starting and driving 5 41 TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING PROCEDURES All mode 4WD system provides 4 positions AUTO 2WD 4H and 4LO so you can select t
99. mum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For details see Battery in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before operating the vehicle For details see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual TIRE EQUIPMENT 1 SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave ment However the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions If you operate your ve hicle on snowy or icy roads INFINITI recom mends the use of MUD amp SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels Please consult an INFINITI dealer for the tire type size speed rating and availability informa tion 2 For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires 3 Tire chains may be used For details see Tire chains in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in
100. nec essary for most effective protection Fail ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident Status light The front passenger air bag status light is located under the climate controls The light op erates as follows Unoccupied passenger s seat The is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Passenger s seat occupied by a small adult child or child restraint as outlined in this section The illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Occupied passenger seat and the passen ger meets the conditions outlined in this section The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera tional Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to auto matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U S regulations If the front passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a crash The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system to certain front passenger seat occupants such as children by requiring the air bag
101. not affect the function or performance of the brake system 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed For additional information see the Maintenance Log section of your INFINITI Ser vice and Maintenance Guide booklet for mainte nance intervals FUSES Two types of fuses are used Type is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment Type is used in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration This will not affect the performance of the fuse Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under hood fuse boxes Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes W WN ENGINE COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not come on check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the engine hood Maintenance and do it yourself 8 23 3 Remove the fuse box cover by push
102. on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 5 4 Starting and driving Additional information This system does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire The low tire pressure warning system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 26 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driv ing The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted After all 4 tires are inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi nate If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature check the tire pres sure for all four tires The Tire and Loading Information label also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label is located in the driver s door opening You can also check the pressure of all tir
103. phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide later in this section You can also visit www InfinitiUSA com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone owner s manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones If reception between callers is unclear ad justing the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve the clarity See Call volume later in this section 4 72 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions This device may not cause interference and this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause un desired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer
104. pressures including the spare often and always prior to long dis tance trips The recommended tire pres sure specifications are shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar Tire pressures should be checked regularly because e Most tires naturally lose air over time Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds Incorrect tire pressure including un der inflation may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling AWARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certifica tion label The vehicle weight ca pacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Do not load your ve hicle beyond this capacity Over loading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life unsafe operat ing conditions due to premature tire failure or unfavorable han dling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident Loading beyond the spe
105. removed and inserted and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors Opening and closing windows The driver s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto matic operation at the same time To open the windows turn the driver s door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked To close the windows turn the driver s door key to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked Windows stop when the key cylinder is released LPD0241 Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the lock position then close the door To unlock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 2 LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the lock position When locking the door this way be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle To unlock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the unlock position Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 5 Lockout protection When the power door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition switch and any door open all doors will lock and the
106. removed from the ignition switch This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily The steering wheel moves back into posi tion when the key is inserted into the ignition switch For more information see Automatic drive posi tioner later in this section PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad justed for driving comfort Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the brake and accelerator pedal position away from the driver or toward the driver The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad justed separately A WARNING Do not adjust the pedal position while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident A CAUTION Do not adjust the pedal position with your foot on the pedal Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 25 SUN VISORS 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments To block glare from the front swing down the main sun visor 2 To block glare from the side remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side 3 To block glare from the side and front swing down the sub sun visor Q Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed A CAUTION Do not store the sun visor before return ing the extension to its original position Do not pull the extension sun visor forc edly downward VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror pull the sun visor down and flip
107. removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody If possible avoid fully load ing your vehicle when using tire chains In addi tion drive at a reduced speed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels Do not use tire chains on dry roads Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear paved roads WD10258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation INFINITI recommends rotating the tires every 7 500 miles 12 000 km See Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section in this manual for tire re placing procedures As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Maintenance and do it yourself 8 39 Wheel nut tightening torque 98 ft lb 133 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tight ened to specifications at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval AWARNING e After rotating the tires check and adjust the tire pressure Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotatio
108. request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual 1 66 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 SRS Air bag warning labels The warning labels are located on the sur face of the sun visors SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration Oy a LRSO100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air light displaying AF in the instrument panel moni tors the circuits of the supplemental front impact air bag front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner systems The monitored circuits in clude the Air bag Control Unit ACU crash zone sensor satellite sensors rollover sensor occu pant classification system front air bag modules side air bag modules curtain and rollover air bag modules pretensioners and all related wiring bag warning When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warn ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing
109. rises to a high temperature refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this owner s manual Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle s first 500 miles 805 km For the first 500 miles 805 km that you do tow do not drive over 50 MPH 80 km h Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the INFINITI Ser vice and Maintenance Guide When making a turn your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels To compensate for this make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle trailer handling possibly caus ing vehicle sway When being passed by larger vehicles be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve hicle handling Do the following if the trailer begins to sway 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow This combination will help stabilize the ve hicle Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes When the trailer sway stops gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road ina safe area Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal anced as described earlier in this s
110. rough road surfaces or passing trucks 9 20 Technical and consumer information AWARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings Your vehicle may be ca pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1 16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight Additionally the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground Weight carrying hitches A weight carrying or dead weight ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue
111. seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover etc Otherwise the seat may become overheated Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or any simi lar materials If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked by your INFINITI dealer The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running HEATED STEERING WHEEL LICO421 The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68 F 20 C The heated steering wheel switch is located on the front of the console box Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts The indicator light will come on If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68 F 20 C the system will heat the steering wheel to approximately 86 F 30 C and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68 F 20 C The indicator light will remain on as long as the system Is on Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually The indicator light will go off NOTE If the sur
112. serious vehicle damage or personal injury Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2 wheel dynamometer such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unex pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or per sonal injury Accelerating quickly sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control If at all possible avoid sharp turning maneuvers particularly at high speeds Your INFINITI four wheel drive vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car The vehicle is not de signed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could re sult in loss of control and or a rollover accident Always use tires of the same type size brand construction bias bias belted or radial and tread pattern on all four wheels Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully Be sure to check the brakes immedi ately after driving in mud or water See Brake system later in this section for Wet brakes Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills If you get out of the vehicle and it roll
113. shift switch is shifted e Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads Driv ing on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise tire wear and increased fuel consumption If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads inthe AUTO or 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the automatic transmission shift selector to the N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking Starting and driving 5 47 PARKING PARKING ON HILLS e HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb e HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL NO CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen ter of the road if it moves A WARNING e Never leave the engine running while 4 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi the vehicle is unattended ti e Do not stop or park the vehicle over
114. sion It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section AWARNING When fastening the seat belts be certain that the seatbacks are completely se cured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically re tracts Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor When the vehicle slows down rapidly Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation as follows Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly The retractor should lock and re strict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion see an INFINITI dealer 1 25 Center of the 3rd row bench seat The 3rd row center seat belt has a connector tongue Q and a seat belt tongue Both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely latched for proper seat belt opera tion AWARNING Always fasten the connector tongue and the seat belt in the order shown Always make sure b
115. the INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared However to clear all programming press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button complete the following 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Press and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly release both buttons The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manu facturer or dealer of those devices for additional informa
116. the finest equipment is used These char acteristics are completely normal in a given re ception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your INFINITI radio system Reception conditions will constantly change be cause of vehicle movement Buildings terrain signal distance and interference from other ve hicles can work against ideal reception De scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the de vice in a different location may reduce or elimi nate the noise FM RADIO RECEPTION Range FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi 40 48 km with monaural single channel FM having slightly more range than stereo FM Exter nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi 40 km The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver FM signals follow a line of sight path exhibiting many of the same char acteristics as light For example they will reflect off objects Fade and drift As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter the signals will tend to fade and or drift Static and flutter During signal interference from buildings large hills or due to antenna position 4 26 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems
117. the follow ing illustration Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Luggage Trailer Tongue Weight Occupants t 6G oo 150 Ib x 2 300 lb 30 lb x 2 60 Ib 300 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg 27kg 135 kg Luggage Pr 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib 14kg 27 kg Occupants Lk 150 Ib x 2 300 Ib 70 kg 135 kg Occupants Luggage RRRA ECGS 150 Ib x 5 750 Ib 30 Ib x 5 150 b 70 kg 340 kg 14 kg 70 kg Example Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 740 Ib 336 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 1 040 Ib 472 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 500 Ib 227 kg LT10152 Steps for determining correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capac ity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 X 150 650 Ibs or 640 340 5 X 70 300 kg
118. the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off A CAUTION Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment Al ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid e Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component har nesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position This Maintenance and do it yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform A genuine INFINITI service manual is also avail able See Owner s Manual Service Manual or der information in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions and could affect warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing have it done by an INFINITI dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS RSEN 8 6 Maintenance and do it yourself 1 Battery 2 Fuse fusible link box 3 Transmission dipstick
119. the vehicle during winter A scraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades e A sturdy flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowadrifts Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser voir tank DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE AWARNING e Wet ice 32 F 0 C and freezing rain very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded Whatever the condition drive with cau tion Accelerate and slow down with care If accelerating or downshifting too fast the drive wheels will lose even more traction Allow more stopping distance under these conditions Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement Allow greater following distances on slippery roads Watch for slippery spots glare ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reach ing it Try not to brake while on the ice and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control on slip pery roads Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle Starting and driving 5 55 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER if so equipped Engine block heaters are
120. tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be bal anced as required Wheel balance service should be per formed with the wheels off the vehicle Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Infor mation Canada in the Warranty In formation Booklet Care of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed 8 42 Maintenance and do it yourself Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead INFINITI recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Fuel recommendation 00ce eee neces 9 3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 9 5 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations c 422s22retdecicivateeretseees 9 6 SP CCUCAUCN ss aparece aden eee wan ceg aes ren baa 9 7 PAGING 22 lt aeewex nego ae esst ondeee S T 9 7 Wheels and tireS 0 0 0 c cee eee 9 8 Dimensions and we
121. to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child s height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward facing child restraints be secured to the designated an chor point on the vehicle Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0364 LATCH system lower anchor locations captain s chairs LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system compatible child restraints This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only 2nd row captain s chairs if so equipped 1 33 LATCH lower anchor AWARNING Failure to follow the warnings and i
122. to be auto matically turned OFF Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor pressure sensor It is in the bottom of the front passenger seat cushion and Is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight It works together with seat belt sensors described later For example if a child is in the front passenger seat the Advanced Air Bag Sys tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations Also if a child restraint of the type specified in the regula tions is on the seat its weight and the child s weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF Occupant classification sensor opera tion can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors The front passenger seat belt sensors are de signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat belt such as when it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode child restraint mode Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat belt the Advanced Air Bag System determines whether the front passenger air bag should be automatically turned OFF as required by the regulations 1 61 Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out lined in this manual should not cause the passen ger air bag to be automatically t
123. to the N position If the indicator light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while Then the light will turn on or off Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO Otherwise gears may grind damaging the drive system While changing in and out of 4LO the ignition switch must be in the ON position and the vehicle s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights 4WD shift and 4LO position indicator to be operable Otherwise the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO The EFF indicator light will also turn on when 4LO is selected See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system later in this section Starting and driving 5 43 The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the driving conditions There are four types of drive modes available AUTO 2WD 4H and 4LO The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the transfer case operation Rotate the switch to move between each mode 2WD AUTO 4H and 4LO You must push the switch in to select 4LO and the vehicle MUST be stationary and the shift selector in the N position when chang ing into or out of 4LO AWARNING When parking apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make s
124. touch the surface of the disc e Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion 4 50 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated Do not store the cards in highly humid loca tions Do not expose the cards to direct sunlight Do not spill any liquids on the cards Refer to the CompactFlash card Owner s Manual for more details CF cards A CAUTION Do not force the CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash player slot Forcing the CF card could damage the pins inside the CF player slot especially if the CF card is upside down or backwards Never touch the terminal portion of the Com pactFlash cards Do not bend the cards Always place the cards in the storage case when they are not being used Do not place heavy objects on the cards Volume control switch Phone operation switch POWER on and MODE select switch 4 Tuning switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel POWER on switch
125. usage for the driver For the front passenger it additionally monitors the weight of an occupant or object on the seat and seat belt tension Based on information from the sensors only one front air bag may inflate in a crash depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted Additionally the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions depending on the weight detected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used If the front passenger air bag is OFF the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated if the seat is unoccupied the light will not be illuminated but the air bag will be off See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system If you have any questions about your air bag system please contact INFINITI or your INFINITI dealer If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability you may also contact INFINITI Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner s Manual When a front air bag inflates a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken to not inhale it as it may cause Irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Front ai
126. usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter static or flutter can be heard This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response Multipath reception Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time The signals may cancel each other resulting in mo mentary flutter or loss of sound AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals because of their low frequency can bend around objects and skip along the ground In addition the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth Because of these characteristics AM signals are also sub ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver Fading Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist Static Caused by thunderstorms electrical power lines electric signs and even traffic lights SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced the satellite radio may not work properly This is not a mal function Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless
127. vehicle 2 Vehicle load limit See loading infor km at moderate speeds The recom mation in the Technical and con mended cold tire inflation is set by the sumer information section manufacturer to provide the best bal 3 Original tire size The size of the tires ance OL ie Weal vehicle handling driveability tire noise etc up to the originally installed on the vehicle at vehicle s GVWR the factory Tire size refer to Tire labeling later in this section 8 34 Maintenance and do it yourself 4 Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label 5 Add air to the tire as needed If too much air is added press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed 6 Install the valve stem cap 7 Check the pressure of all other tires wwe Checking tire pressure including the spare Example TIRE LABELING 1 Remove the valve stem cap from the Size Cold Tire Inflation Federal law requires tire manufacturers to tire Pressure place standardized information on the 2 Press the pressure gauge squarely Front Original Tire ane sidewall of all tires This information iden onto the valve stem Do not press too P275 60R20 240 kPa 35 PSI tifies and describes the fundamental hard or force the valve stem side Rear Original Tire cha
128. vehicle is not functioning properly the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink See 4WD warning light in the Starting and driving section A CAUTION If the warning light comes on or blinks during operation have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads in the AUTO or 4H position shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD in the 4LO position stop the vehicle move the automatic transmission shift selector lever to the N position and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD If the warning light is still on after the above operation have your vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible Low fuel warning light This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is conve nient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty KOJ Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position
129. wheel drive models are less capable than four wheel drive models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud or the like Please observe the following precautions AWARNING e Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain Starting and driving 5 7 Do not drive across steep slopes In stead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes Off road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward Many hills are too steep for any vehicle If you drive up them you may stall If you drive down them you may not be able to control your speed If you drive across them you may roll over Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill At the top there could be a drop off or other hazard that could cause an accident If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill never at tempt to turn around Your vehicle could tip or roll over Always back straight down in R Reverse gear and apply brakes to control your speed Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade resulting in loss of control and an acci dent App
130. yourself SPARK PLUGS REPLACING SPARK PLUGS lridium tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace iridium tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer Fol low the maintenance log shown in the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide Do not service iridium tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap ping e Always replace spark plugs with rec ommended or equivalent ones AWARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re move the spark plugs An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs If replacement is required see your INFINITI dealer for assistance AIR CLEANER The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in your INFINITI Service and Mainte nance Guide When replacing the filter wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth To remove the air cleaner filter Loosen the screw 2 Disconnect the electrical connector 3 Push down on the clips and remove the air cleaner cover Remove the air cleaner filter AWARNING e Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth ers to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops the flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine
131. 2 Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer 3 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum tongue king pin load 9 18 Technical and consumer information To determine the available towing capacity use the following procedure 1 Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this section 2 Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum towing capacity To determine the Gross Trailer Weight weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo that are normally in the trailer when it is towed Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat ings Example Gross Vehicle Weight GVW as weighed onascale including passengers cargo and hitch 6 400 Ib 2902 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR from F M V S S C M V S S certific
132. 20 m ahead AWARNING This system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device It is the driver s re sponsibility to stay alert drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times The system is primarily intended for use on straight dry open roads with light traffic It is not advisable to use the system in city traffic or congested areas This system will not adapt automati cally to road conditions This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves or on icy roads in heavy rain or in fog The distance sensor will not detect under most conditions Stationary and slow moving vehicles Pedestrians or objects in the roadway Oncoming vehicles in the same lane Motorcycles or scooters traveling offset in the travel lane This system will not automatically brake the vehicle to a stop AWARNING As there is a performance limit to the distance control function never rely solely on the Intelligent Cruise Control system This system does not correct careless inattentive or absent minded driving or overcome poor visibility in rain fog or other bad weather Deceler ate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surround ing circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles Although the brake operation is con
133. 2c0u6endhusomeessagseu ewe 2 53 Map IIGiie teee25ues5ce5neeeeeeuesueeneeeseseoees 2 54 OO WON gee ecg eae oe ees We i Se ees 2 54 HomeLink universal transceiver 00055 2 54 Programming HomeLink 2 55 Programming HomeLink for Canadian CUSTOMS caset tt tawewnes ene omen tae eee eos 2 56 Operating the HomeLink universal WeNSCE Wels cian haere cae ces meas Sauer aeoure 2 56 Programming trouble diagnosis 5 2 56 Clearing the programmed information 2 57 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 2 57 If your vehicle is stolen 02 0005 2 57 INSTRUMENT PANEL 32 30 181716 15 33 31 29 28 22 20 26 2 2 Instruments and controls Vents P 4 21 Headlight fog light turn signal switch P 2 24 Steering wheel switch for audio control and Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System P 4 51 4 70 Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 52 P 2 30 Meters gauges and warning indicator lights P 2 3 2 8 Instrument brightness control P 2 28 Cruise control main set switches if so equipped and Intelligent cruise control main set switches if so equipped P 5 17 P 5 19 Windshield wiper washer switch and rear window wiper washer switch P 2 22 P 2 23 Ignition switch P 5 9 Navigation system P 4 2 Navigation system controls P 4 2 Audio system controls P 4 26 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 52 Gl
134. 4 Engine oil filler cap 5 Brake fluid reservoir 6 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 7 Air cleaner 8 Drive belt location 9 Radiator cap 10 Power steering fluid reservoir 11 Engine oil dipstick 12 Engine coolant reservoir NOTE Engine cover removed for clarity ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant to provide year round anti freeze and coolant protection The anti freeze so lution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors Ad ditional engine cooling system additives are not necessary AWARNING Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Wait until the engine and radiator cool down Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual The radiator is equipped with a pres sure type radiator cap To prevent en gine damage use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap A CAUTION When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant green or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50 anti freeze and 50 demineralized or distilled water The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors such as or ange may damage the engine cooling system Demineral ized or dis tilled water Genuine
135. AKING A CALL To make a call follow the procedure below 1 Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel or the 4 switch on the steering wheel The Phone screen will appear on the display 2 Select the Call Phonebook key on the Phone menu and press the ENTER button 3 Select the registered person s name from the list and press the ENTER button Dialing will start and the screen will change to the Call in Progress screen 4 76 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 After the call is over perform one of the following to finish the call a Select the Hang up key on the Call in Progress screen and press the ENTER button b Press the S amp F switch on the steering wheel c When the Call in Progress screen is dis played press the PHONE button on the instrument panel to hang up If any other screen is currently displayed press the PHONE button to display the Call in Progress screen first then press the PHONE button again to hang up There are different methods to make a call Select one of the following options instead of Call Phonebook in Step 2 above Redial Dial the previously dialed number again Call Call Logs Select the name or phone number from the incoming or outgoing call logs Call Downloaded Select the name or phone number from the downloaded cellular phonebook Dial Keypad Input the phone number manually us
136. AM FM button is pressed the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an XM satellite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO AM FM button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception TUNE FLDR Tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FLDR knob to the right or left SEEK CAT and TRACK tuning buttons Press the SEEK CAT 4 button or the TRACK gt button for less than 1 5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequen cies and stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN RPT SCAN tuning button Press the SCAN RPT button to initiate scan tun ing Scan tuning will stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds Press the SCAN RPT but ton again during this 5 second period to stop scan tuning the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN RPT button is not pressed within 5 seconds scan tuning moves to the next station PRESET A B C Station memory opera tions 18 stations can be set for the FM AM and SAT radio to the A B and C preset button in any combination of FM AM or SAT stations 1 Choose preset bank A B or C using the
137. AND WEIGHTS Overall length Overall width Overall height 2wd with roof rack 4wd with roof rack Front Track Rear Track Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating Gross axle weight rating Front Rear in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg 206 9 5 254 79 6 2 021 76 7 1 948 77 5 1 968 68 1 1 729 68 1 1 729 123 2 3 130 See the F M V S S C M V S S certification label on the center pillar be tween the driver s side front and side doors WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your INFINITI ve hicle in another country you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi cle s engine Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline There fore avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country state province or district it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis sion control and safety standards vary according to the country state province or district there fore vehicle specifications may differ When any vehicle is to be taken into an other country state province or district and registered its modi
138. Auto Interior Illumination Select to turn on or turn off the illumination of the interior lights when any door is unlocked Auto Headlights Sensitivity Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher right or lower left Auto Headlights Off Delay Select to change the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from O 30 45 60 90 120 150 and 180 second periods Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Select to turn on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati cally according to the vehicle speed i intelligent Key Lock Reply Remote Key Response Horn Select to turn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used when the LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed NOTE If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob the mode will not be changed with the display Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re enable the display control Remote Key Response Lights Select to turn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash mode used when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed NOTE If you change the horn beep or the light flash feature with the keyfob the mode will not be changed with the display Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re enable the display control Auto Re Lock Time Select to set the length of time before doors automatically re lock Selective Door Unlock When this item is turned on only the driver s door is unlocked firs
139. B ee CE O Adjusting the item Touch the key 1 or the key to adjust the settings Touch the UP key to scroll up to the previous page or touch the DOWN key to scroll down to next page Settings gt Edit Phone Name 8 00 sack OOOO OOOO OO Lowercase Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key 1 There are some options available when inputting characters e Uppercase Shows uppercase characters e Lowercase Shows lowercase characters Space Inserts a space Symbols Shows symbols such as the question mark e Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch Touch and hold the Delete key to delete all of the characters o OK Completes the character input Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen use a dry soft cloth If additional cleaning is necessary use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth Never spray the screen with water or de tergent Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen START UP SCREEN When you place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position the SYSTEM START UP warning is displayed on the screen When you read and agree with the warning press the ENTER button If you do not push the ENTER button you will not be able to use the navigation system To proceed to the next step refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual 1 2 3
140. CC or ON position press the PWR button to turn the DVD rear display on or off NOTE The PWR button on the remote control only turns the rear display on or off Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side facing up The DVD will be guided automatically into the slot If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted the DVD player will automatically turn on A CAUTION Do not force the compact disc into the slot This could damage the player 4 64 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems MODE select button Press the MODE button to select Audio Video source between DVD and AUX input input jacks on the faceplate Red right channel audio input White left channel audio input and Yellow Video input The display will show the AUX in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds once the Mode is changed to AUX To use the input jacks refer to Auxiliary input jacks in this section Di When the gt PLAY button on the remote control is pressed the player will play In play mode the display will briefly show on the upper left corner of the display gt gt lt lt FF Fast Forward REW Rewind Press the gt fast forward 44 rewind buttons to carry out the fast forward or rewind presentation at 5 times normal play speed Press the gt fast forward 44 rewind buttons again or PLAY button to resume the normal play speed PP Pp
141. CT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation Check the underbody for accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as possible 7 6 Appearance and care A CAUTION e NEVER remove dirt sand or other de bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface de icing are extremely corrosive They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corro sion which may be required in some areas con sult an INFINITI dealer 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Maintenance requirements 0 cc eee ee eae 8 2 General maintenance 2 0e cece eee eee 8 2 Explanation of general maintenance items 8 2 Maintenance precautionS s s s sasana cece eee eee 8 5 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine cooling system ne5 x este wteslerdas vot
142. E Auto Headlights Off Delay if Speed Sensing Wiper Interval BE Remote Key Response Horn 5 4 3 HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis play screen in menus Whenever a menu selec tion is made or menu item is highlighted different areas on the screen provide you with important information See the following for details 1 Header Shows the path used to get to the current screen for example press the SETTING button gt then select the Comfort amp Conv key Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 5 2 Menu Selections Shows the options to choose within that menu screen for example Auto Interior Illu mination etc 3 UP DOWN Movement Indicator Shows that the INFINITI controller may be used to move UP DOWN on the screen and select more options 4 Screen Count Shows the number of menu selections avail able for that screen for example 1 14 5 Footer Information Line Provides more information if available about the menu selection currently high lighted for example Cabin lighting when unlocking doors HOW TO USE THE STATUS BUTTON To display the status of the audio climate control system fuel consumption and navigation system press the STATUS button The following information will appear when the STATUS button is pressed Audio Audio and climate control system Audio climate control temperature settings a
143. For your safety read carefully and keep in this vehicle 2010 Infiniti QX56 Owners Manual FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new INFINITI owners This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you under stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles kilome ters of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov ering your vehicle The INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve hicle Additionally a separate Customer Care Lemon Law Booklet U S only will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law Your INFINITI dealership knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them Additionally a separate Customer Care and Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satisfying ownership experience for as long as you own your car Should you have any questions
144. I recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli gent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact an INFINITI dealer OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 4 When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat ing location the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is within 31 50 in 80 cm from each request switch 1 If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range it is possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock unlock the doors DOOR LOCKS UNLOCKS PRECAUTION Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli gent Key is outside the vehicle After locking with the door handle request switch verify the doors are securely locked by testing them Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 9 To
145. I dealer do it promptly In addition you should notify an INFINITI dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work closely observe the Maintenance precau tions later in this section EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly Also ensure that all latches lock securely Lubricate hinges latches latch pins rollers and links as necessary Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequently Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check headlight aim Road wheel nuts lug nuts When checking the tires make sure no wheel nuts are missing and check for any loose wheel nuts Tighten if necessary Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7 500 miles 12 000 km Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips If neces sary adjust the pressure in
146. ICle lt vecscsuyestaerecsenty ge vecuake 5 12 Engine protection mode 0 0006 5 12 Automatic TrANSMISSION 4 222225 2eeecneewcecieee 5 13 Parking Drako c2ecyuseesusercaudeadceeeereanccaes 5 17 Cruise control if so equipped 0 cece eee ee 5 17 Precautions on cruise control 5 17 Cruise control operationS 0 cee eee Intelligent Cruise Control system if so equipped Selecting the intelligent cruise control mode Vehicle to vehicle distance control mode Precautions on vehicle to vehicle distance COR Ol MOG Gee soc cowie Sembee dary eegaemea sue Conventional FIXED SPEED cruise control NO OG tyrone wits ae eck tare E ig wee eee wes wie es Brake Assist WITH PREVIEW FUNCTION for Intelligent Cruise Control System equipped MODS acs cea E cadens EE vse aekon eee Brake ASSiSt lt seiccertigdetsad accaaddsauses a Preview TUNCHON 202246500003 d40deeaee0ndae dre Breakin schedule ccd p eareidn wears ees ees ees Increasing fuel economy s 2c xnseccereuteeeereeeans E35z3 Using four wheel drive 4WD Transfer case shifting procedures Parking parking on RillS c t caedens ee seenaeeees Power SICCIING co cc0teieketecedwotaaeod seep er haic Brake system eines cageereu te ween eee snidcacee tees Brake precautions c22 atdecdskaw swan Geer enk wedde Anti lock Braking System ABS 0055 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system
147. If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player Files with extensions other than MP3 WMA mp3 or wma cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Cannot play Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of MP3 WMA writing applica tions or other text editing applications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the CD CF is protected by copyright Poor sound quality Check if the CD CF is scratched or dirty It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 WMA CD CF or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts before the music starts playing playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the Music cuts off or skips awe a specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data files Moves immediately to the When a non MP3 WMA file has been given an extension of MP3 WMA mp3 or wma or when play is prohibited by copyright pro
148. Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear Check fluid levels such as engine oil cool ant brake fluid and window washer fluid as frequently as possible or at least whenever you refuel Check that all windows and lights are clean Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition Also check tires for proper inflation Check that all doors are closed Position seat and adjust head restraint Adjust inside and outside mirrors Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position See Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Starting and driving 5 11 STARTING THE ENGINE 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Move the shift selector to P Park or N Neutral P Park is recommended The shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector is in any of the driving positions 3 Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START Release the key when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure f the engine is very hard to start in ex tremely cold weat
149. N position INFINITI Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the switch is pressed before the initializa tion completes voice commands will not be ac cepted Please wait until the INFINITI Voice Rec ognition initialization is completed BEFORE STARTING To get the best recognition performance from Voice Recognition observe the following The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises traffic noise and vi bration sounds etc which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice commands Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Speak in a natural conversational voice with out pausing between words lf the air conditioner is set to Auto the fan speed is automatically lowered so that your commands can be recognized more easily GIVING VOICE COMMANDS 1 Press the F steering wheel switch located on the Sy Voice Recognition K amp To exit hold the TALK switch 2 A list of commands appears on the screen and the system announces Would you like to access Phone Navigation Information or Help After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to B speak a command Continue to follow the voice menu prompts and speak after the tone sounds until your desired operati
150. NEXT CHAPTER PREVIOUS CHAPTER When the PPI NEXT CHAPTER button is pressed while the DVD is playing the program next to the present one will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through programs The DVD will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the M lt PREVIOUS CHAPTER button is pressed the program being played returns to its beginning Press several times to skip back through pro grams The DVD will go back the number of times the button is pressed EE PAUSE When the II PAUSE button on the remote control is pressed the player will pause playing of the media In pause mode the player will show Il on the upper left corner of the dis play until the player is changed to another mode Tj Press the STOP button once to stop playing the media The display will show W in the upper left corner of the display for 4 seconds and the last disc position will be stored When the PLAY button is pressed again it will resume at the stored disc track and time position If the STOP button is pressed again when the player is already in Stop mode it will reinitialize the pointer to the beginning of the disc In effect it will ignore the last stored disc position and upon receipt of the next play message will begin at the Title Menu or at the beginning of the disc DISPLAY If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2 seconds the display menu will appear on the screen
151. NG Apply the parking brake if the shift selec tor is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N Neutral or any D Drive position the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position Move the shift selector to the P Park position then the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK P Park A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the P Park shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift selector from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the shift selector into the P Park position R Reverse A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the R Reverse position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P Park N Neutral or any drive position
152. PER BLADES CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent Then rinse the blades with clear water If your wind shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper replace the blades A CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam age the windshield and impair driver vision REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn 1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield Push the release tab then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove Remove the wiper blade Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove 6 Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield A CAUTION e After wiper blade replacement return the wiper arm to its original position otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass otherwise the arms may be dam aged from wind pressure Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 I
153. PRESET A B C select button 2 Select the desired FM AM or SAT station band 3 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 4 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 5 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical Country or Rock Artist and song information If the station broadcasts RDS information the RDS icon is displayed Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If t
154. RNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury To avoid or reduce the risk the procedures must be followed precisely A CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder ate personal injury or damage to your ve hicle To avoid or reduce the risk the pro cedures must be followed carefully If you see this symbol it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen amp If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra tion it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle 5 Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action T t Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING A WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts such as lithium batter ies may contain perchlorate material The following advisory is provided Perchlorate Mat
155. RWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section When installing a child restraint system in the rear center position both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured See Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt in this section eo WRS0699 Forward facing front passenger seat step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed in a forward facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat 1 44 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2 Position the child restrain
156. S only 9 30 Screen See INFINITI mobile entertainment SYS EM out a Paw Oak OEE we ee 4 57 Seat adjustment Front power seat adjustment 1 3 Second row bench seats 15 Second row captain s chair 1 4 Third row power folding seats 1 18 Seat belt Child safety wa iesae ie ae as he ae 1 30 Infants and small children 1 30 Injured Perso ss sire yw ate wine 1 23 Larger children 4 1 31 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 20 Pregnant women saasaa aa aaa a 1 23 Pre tensioner seat belt system 1 65 Rear center seat belt 1 26 Seat belt extenders 1 29 Seat belt maintenance 1 29 Seatbelts 0 000048 1 20 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 28 Three point type with retractor 1 23 Seat belt warning light 2 13 Seatback pockets 04 2 38 Seats Adjustment aoaaa 4 24 b oe oe ee 1 2 Automatic drive positioner 3 29 FROM seals a s eae a ae amp Gi ow oe eS 1 2 Heated seats aoaaa aaa 2 30 Second row captain s chair adjustment 1 4 Security indicator light 2 14 Security system INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system engine start 2 21 3 3 5 11 Self adjusting brakes 2 8 22 Service manual order form 9 32 Servicing airconditioner 4 25 Seting DURON s saa e e owed gas amp
157. Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Install 1 Align the headrest stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the headrest is facing the correct direction The stalk with the ad justment notches 4 must be installed in the hole with the lock button 2 Push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down Properly adjust the headrest before an oc cupant uses the seating position 1 13 FLEXIBLE SEATING AWARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold down position In a collision people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident Always replace and adjust them prop erly if they have been removed for any reason e If the head restraints are removed for any reason they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be
158. Security indicator light This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK OFF or ACC position This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational For additional information see Security sys tems later in this section SLIP Slip indicator light This indicator light will blink when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator blinks on If this happens adjust your driving accordingly The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational If the light does not come on or does not go off have the traction control system checked by an INFINITI dealer acy turn signal hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch Is activated Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF indicator light This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch is pushed to OFF the transfer case is in the 4LO position 3 3 model or when the VDC system is not functioning properly This indicates the VDC sys tem Is not operating Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving secti
159. The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the switch while driving You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch between 4H and 4LO unless you have first stopped the vehicle and moved the shift selector to N Neutral Make sure the transfer 4LO posi tion indicator illuminates when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO The indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other Automatic transmission position indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this indicator shows the selector posi tion See Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual Cruise main switch indicator if so equipped This indicator illuminates when the cruise control main switch is pushed The indicator turns off when the main switch is pushed again When the cruise main switch indicator illuminates the cruise control system is operational Cruise set switch indicator This indicator illuminates while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system If the indicator blinks while the engine Is running it may indicate the cruise control system is not function ing properly Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer Intelligent Cruise Control ICC system main switch indicator if so equipped This indicator is displayed when the Intelligent Cruise Control ICC system main switch is pushed When the main switch is pushed again the indicator turns of
160. To protect the paint surfaces please wash your vehicle as soon as you can after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain after driving on coastal roads when contaminants such as soot bird drop pings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area When it is necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water 7 2 Appearance and care A CAUTION Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent Some car washes espe cially brushless ones use some acid for cleaning The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components causing them to crack This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to function properly Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used e Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap strong chemical deter gents gasoline or solvents Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun light or while the vehicle body is hot as the surface may become
161. Top tether anchor for installation instructions 2nd row bench if so equipped on the floor When installing a child restraint carefully read tether strap may damage it during a behind the outboard seating positions as and follow the instructions in this manual and collision A child could be seriously in ne those supplied with the child restraint jured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged 2nd row captain s chairs if so equipped on the floor behind the seats as shown 3rd row bench seat on the floor of the cargo area behind the center seat position as shown 1 36 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0361 LRS0640 WRS0801 2nd row bench seat if so equipped REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system 1 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions 3rd row bench seat Rear facing web mounted step 2 2 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 37 WRS0802 Rear fac
162. VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM A CAUTION e Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will by pass the variable voltage control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Use electrical accessories with the en gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator The current sensor A is located near the battery along the negative battery cable If you add elec trical accessories to your vehicle be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area DRIVE BELT Power steering fluid pump Automatic belt tensioner Water pump Cooling fan Air conditioner compressor Crankshaft pulley Generator NO oS oS YS AWARNING Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt The engine could rotate unexpectedly Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 1 Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear Cuts fraying or looseness If the belt is in poor condition or is loose have it replaced or adjusted by an INFINITI dealer 2 Have the belt checked regularly for condi tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in your INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide 8 16 Maintenance and do it
163. a wire that hangs down from the motor If the wire originates from under a light lens you will need to remove the lens to access the program button NOTE Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open er s motor and the training light is lit you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7 Use the help of a second person for conve nience to assist when performing this step 7 Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas ing the garage door opener s program but 2 56 Instruments and controls ton quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink button you ve just programmed Press and release the HomeLink button up to 3 times to complete the training 8 Your HomeLink button should now be pro grammed To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers follow steps 2 4 only NOTE Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to clear all previously programmed HomeLink buttons If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992 D O C regulations required hand held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec onds To program your hand held transmitter to HomeLink continue to press and hold the HomeLink button see steps 2 4 under Pro gramming HomeLink
164. ability of genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact 1 800 450 9491 www nissan techinfo com infiniti For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior see an INFINITI dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Owner s Manuals for this model year and prior see an INFINITI dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI Service Manual or Owner s Manual please contact your nearest INFINITI dealer For the phone number and location of an INFINITI dealer in your area call the INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1 800 361 4792 and a bilingual INFINITI representative will assist you Also available are genuine INFINITI Service and Owner s Manuals for older INFINITI models IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION Unfortunately accidents do occur In this unlikely event there is some important information you should know Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non genuine collision parts in order to cut costs among other reasons Insist on the use of genuine INFINITI collision parts If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to INFINITI s original exacting specifica tions if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value the solution is simple Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genui
165. adjustments Ifthe battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the memory storage function will be canceled and must be restarted before a stored memory position can be set again Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH 40 km h to restart the memory storage function You can also restart the memory storage function using the following procedure 1 Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse 2 Open and close the driver s door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position Once the memory storage function has been restarted you can store a memory position See Memory storage function earlier in this section Selecting the memorized position Set the shift selector to the P Park position then Within 45 seconds of opening the driver s door push the memory switch 1 or 2 or Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and push the memory switch 1 or 2 The driver s seat steering wheel accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light blink ing and then the light will stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds ENTRY EXIT FUNCTION This system is designed so that the driver s seat and steering wheel will automatically move when the shift selector is placed in the P Park posi tion This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver s seat more easily The drivers seat and steering wheel will slide backward
166. afe mode is activated the lift gate slowly closes A continuous warning chime sounds until the lift gate is in the fully down position Then the lift gate will be pulled to the closed and latched position by a motor The power lift gate cannot be opened using the switches at any time in the safe mode The auto reverse function remains active while the lift gate is closing in the safe mode Do not operate the lift gate again until it is checked by your INFINITI dealer A CAUTION If the power lift gate does not stay open or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at any time while a continuous warning chime sounds do not operate the lift gate There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the lift gate gas stays Have the lift gate inspected by an INFINITI dealer e Do not activate the power lift gate if one or both of the lift gate gas stays are removed Damage to the lift gate or power lift gate mechanisms may occur CANCEL cC CANCEL SWITCH Push the switch toward the CANCEL position to disable the rear pillar switch The lift gate can still be opened and closed using the switch on the instrument panel and keyfob The lift gate can also be opened manually with the outside handle if the lift gate is unlocked Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 21 LIFT GATE RELEASE AWARNING Always be sure the lift gate has been closed securely to prevent it from open ing while driving Do not drive with the lift
167. ak ing distances This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the _ vehicle s warranty MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the vehicle is loaded drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not ex ceed either of the gross axle weight rat ings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label If weight ratings are exceeded move or re move items to bring all weights below the ratings Technical and consumer information 9 15 TOWING A TRAILER AWARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling braking and perfor mance and may lead to accidents A CAUTION Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged For the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri marily to carry passengers and cargo Remember
168. al Service Manual Order Information in the Technical and con sumer information section 8 00 zack Select Units Select the US mi F MPG key or the Metric km C L 100 km key to change the units shown on the display Audio settings For audio settings refer to Audio System later in this section Navigation settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding these set tings Volume and beeps settings Navigation volume For navigation volume settings refer to the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual for infor mation regarding these settings Phone volume For phone volume settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System later in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 17 Settings gt Volume and Beeps 8 00 sack Bi UP A Guidance voice ON E Ringer vo CMMMMIMI incoming cau OUI E gi Outgoing Call Iie H se eaii o OWN Beep when a button is pushed Beep setting With this option on indicator light illuminated a beep will sound if any control panel button is pressed Phone settings For phone settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System later in this section 12 OFF BUTTON To change the display brightness press the Xt D OFF button Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night displ
169. alcohol in cause the DVD player to malfunction tended for industrial use 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 67 e DVDs with a region code other than 1 The region code A is displayed in a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD e DVDs that are not round e DVDs with a paper label e DVDs that are warped scratched or have unequal edges e Recordable digital video discs DVD R e Rewritable digital video discs DVD RW If a DVD with a paper label is used and becomes jammed you may be able to reset the unit and eject the jammed disc with the following procedure 1 Record the radio presets 2 Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery for five minutes 3 Reconnect the negative battery termi nal 4 Check to see if the jammed DVD has been ejected If it has not try to eject the DVD by pushing the eject button 5 If the disc cannot be ejected see your INFINITI dealer for further assistance 6 Re program the radio presets 4 68 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Remote control and headphones battery replacement Replace the battery as follows 1 2 Open the lid Replace batteries with new ones Size AA remote control Size AAA headphones Make sure thatthe and ends on the batteries match the markings inside the compartment 3 Close the lid securely
170. all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name The Gracenote MusiclD Service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusiclD ser vice to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote MusiclD Service The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or warran ties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or cat egories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its online services at any time
171. an XM satellite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal If possible do not put cargo over the satellite antenna A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc COMPACT Wise AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Compact disc CD player A CAUTION e Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot This could damage the CD and or CD changer player Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and or CD changer e Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD player sometimes cannot func tion when the compartment tempera ture is extremely high or low Decrease increase the temperature before use Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 27 Do not expose the CD to direct sun
172. and is recognized the system will announce the recognized command and perform the requested action If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice after the tone Operating tips Say a command after the tone Voice com mands cannot be accepted when the icon is If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice Press the f switch on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen If you want to cancel the command press and hold the f4 switch The message Voice cancelled will be announced If you want to adjust the volume of the sys tem feedback push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement To minimize the amount of prompts spoken by the system in Alternate Command Mode use the Minimize Voice Feedback function To ac cess the Minimize Voice Feedback function press the SETTING button then select the Others key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button Then select the Voice Recognition key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Only single digits O zero to 9 can be used When saying
173. ange Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized available during phone number entry Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Phonebook Makes a call to the last dialed number International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken as well as star pound and plus Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 87 Vehicle Information Command if so equipped COMMAND ACTION Traffic Info Turns the traffic information system on and off Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information Trip Computer Displays Trip information Maintenance Displays Maintenance information 4 88 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Voice command examples Some basic voice command examples are de scribed here For navigation system commands see the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual Sy Voice Recognition w Phone amp To exit hold the TALK switch Example 1 Placing a call to the phone 2 The system announces Would you like to number 800 662 6200 access Phone Navigation Information or Help 1 Press the 44 switch located on the steering wheel 3 Say Phone Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 89 gt Voice Recognition gt Phone Loy Voice Recognition gt Dial Number 2 Voice Recognition gt Dial Number u BC o OOO eC Dial Number Ga
174. ank interval within 1 program or there is no interval between pro grams the system may not stop in the desired or expected location Next Previous track Music Box Push the tuning switth or N for less than 1 5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks Push and hold the tuning switch W or AN for more than 1 5 seconds to change playlists When the last playlist is playing the next playlist will be selected 4 52 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems mMm eh AM FM CD DVD AUX ys J VOL volume control button 7 Infrared headphone transmitter lens MODE select button Avid speaker control button Red transmitters will be visible when NEXT button infrared headphones are on SEEK button Headphone jacks REAR AUDIO CONTROLS Press the REAR CTRL button on the front radio control panel to turn the rear controls on Press the button again to turn the rear controls off Press the i button the headphones symbol illuminates on the front display when the head phones are on Two headphone jacks are pro vided so two rear seat passengers may listen to the audio system privately One or two infrared headphones are included if the vehicle is equipped with the DVD entertain ment system Most portable radio headphones work with the rear audio controls For vehicles equi
175. ansmis sion down into a lower gear depending on the vehicle speed Fail safe When the fail safe operation occurs please note that the transmission will be locked in any of the forward gears according to the condition If the vehicle is driven under extreme con ditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 3 seconds Then turn the ignition switch back to the ON position The vehicle should re turn to its normal operating condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have an INFINITI dealer check the transmission and repair it if necessary PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL if so equipped A WARNING 4 Be sure the parking brake is fully re r to leased before driving Failure to do so CJ Pa can cause brake failure and lead to an C conss J accident Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle A Do not use the shift selector in place of the parking brake When parking be 4 sure the parking brake is fully engaged e Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle They could release the parking brake and cause an accident LSD0158 To engage Firmly depress the parking brake 1 ACCEL RES switch To release 2 COAST SET switch 3 CANCEL switch 1 Firmly apply the foot
176. arrange Cargo to allow for proper tongue load Gross vehicle weight Gross axle weight AT11025 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight GVW maximum Gross Axle Weight GAW The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment In addition front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Technical and consumer information 9 17 Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment such as the trailer hitch will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR and Towing capacity All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops highway weigh stations building supply centers or salvage yards To determine the available payload capacity for tongue king pin load use the following proce dure 1 Locate the GVWR on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label
177. ash your hands If the acid contacts your eyes skin or clothing immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Do not tip the battery Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce bat tery life and in some cases lead to an explosion When working on or near a battery al ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry Battery posts terminals and related ac cessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash hands after handling Keep battery out of the reach of children Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 a WDI0224 1 Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown Use a cloth to protect the battery case 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself 2 Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening Do not overfill Reinstall the vent caps Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual If the engine does not start by jump starting the battery may have to be replaced Contact an INFINITI dealer
178. assifica tion sensor pressure sensor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system This may affect the front air bag system Tampering with the seat belt system may result in seri ous personal injury Work around and on the side air bag and curtain air bag systems should be done by an INFINITI dealer Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an INFINITI dealer The SRS wiring harnesses should not be modi fied or disconnected Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag systems e A cracked windshield should be re placed immediately by a qualified re pair facility A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual 1 63 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag and roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats The curtain and roll over air bags are located in the side roof rails in all 3 rows Thes
179. at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle A CAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine 4 70 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Your INFINITI is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can Bluetooth make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is paired to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connect ing procedure is required Your phone is auto matically connected with the in vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time INFINITI Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible For more details see INFINITI Voice Recognition System later in this section Befo
180. atalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants AWARNING The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys tem are very hot Keep people animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire A CAUTION e Do not use leaded gasoline Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re duce the three way catalyst s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants Keep your engine tuned up Malfunc tions in the ignition fuel injection or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst causing it to overheat Do not keep driv ing if the engine misfires or if notice able loss of performance or other un usual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by an INFINITI dealer Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the three way catalyst Do not race the engine while warming it up Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine ON PAVEMENT AND OFF ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles They have higher ground clearance than passen ger cars to make them capable of performing ina variety of on pavement and off road applications This gives them a higher cent
181. ategory 1 11 Music Box menu There are some options available during play back Touch the Menu key then select one of the following that are displayed on the screen if necessary Refer to the following information for each item Play by Artist Plays songs by an artist whose music is currently being played The artists are sorted in alphabetical order e Play by Album Plays tracks in each album The albums are sorted in alphabetical order 4 44 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Music Box gt Menu 8 00 Search Artist 2 4 Search Song Details Search Keywords Edit Albums z i Search Albums 6 141 DOWN i Search the artist list e Play by Date Plays tracks in each album The albums are sorted in order of the date when they were stored in the system e Play by Mood Plays music from one of the following moods Relaxing Music Lively Music Slow Music Upbeat Music Play by Category Plays music from one of the following cat Music Box gt Menu 8 00 rcn egories T My Favorites Search Albums Hit Songs Kids Songs au Search Keywords Edit Albums Rarely Played Music Box System Info at Search Song Details Search Artists 71 Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks by the artist and starts playing the first track Search Albums Displays a list of alb
182. ately 10 seconds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered INFINITI Ve hicle Immobilizer System key If the no start condition re occurs INFINITI rec ommends placing the registered INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Sys tem CONT ASSY IMMOBILIZER ANT ASSY IMMOBILIZER This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including inter ference that may cause undesired opera tion of the device Instruments and controls 2 21 CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER S AUTHORITY TO OPER ATE THE EQUIPMENT 2 22 Instruments and controls LICO474 Security indicator light The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK OFF or ACC position This function indicates the INFINITI Ve hicle Immobilizer System is operational If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal functioning the light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position If th
183. ation label 7 300 lb 3311 kg Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR from Towing Load Specification chart 15 100 Ib 6849 kg Maximum Trailer towing capacity from Tow ing Load Specification chart 9 000 lb 4082 kg 7 300 Ib 8311 kg 6 400 Ib 2902 kg GVWR GVW 900 Ib 409 kg Available for tongue weight 15 100 Ib 6849 kg GCWR 6 400 lb 2902 kg GVW 8 700 Ib 8947 kg Capacity available for towing 900 Ib 409 kg Available tongue weight 8 700 lb 3947 kg Available capacity 10 tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passen ger and cargo load in the vehicle Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be tween 10 15 of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange the cargo to ob tain the proper tongue load Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the Towing load specification chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15 If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10 reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION eS Maximum Towing Capacity 9 000 Ib 8 900 lb 8 900 lb 1 2 4 082 kg 4 037 kg 4 037 k
184. ation of the engine oil pressure engine coolant temperature high indicator light or if you feel a lack of engine power detect abnormal noise etc take the following steps 1 Move the vehicle safely off the road apply the parking brake and move the shift selector to P Park Do not stop the engine 2 Turn off the air conditioner Open all the windows move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed 3 Get out of the vehicle Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood If steam or cool ant is escaping turn off the engine Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen 4 Open the engine hood AWARNING If steam or water is coming from the en gine stand clear to prevent getting burned 5 Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness Also check if the cooling fan is running The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water If coolant is leaking the water pump belt is missing or loose or the cooling fan does not run stop the en gine AWARNING Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or get caught in engine belts or the engine cooling fan The engine cooling fan can start at any time 6 After the engine cools down check the cool ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running Add coolant to the engi
185. ation using the seat belts cacta veces taceuclcvesenne yee Forward facing child restraint installation USING LAI CHisscnvcnrsdvennees ceeneeeekensne cs Forward facing child restraint installation using the seat beltS 0 cece eee eee Installing top tether strap 2nd row captain s chairs or 2nd row bench seat if so equipped 0 cc cece eee ees Installing top tether strap 3rd row bench SEAL 2ccccimorceeesnaceowneueee Booster SCdlSsciGecacceeewenceecsStaewasseeees Supplemental restraint system 00 c eee eee Precautions on supplemental restraint SV SIC ee ean eet e eta ed scene sede sees Supplemental air bag warning labels Supplemental air bag warning light SEATS Sit upright and well back AWARNING e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly See Precau tions on seat belt usage later in this section After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked Do not leave children unat
186. ause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device Starting and driving 5 5 AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER AWARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident Be alert and drive defensively at all times Obey all traffic regulations Avoid excessive speed high speed cornering or sudden steering maneuvers because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle AS with any ve hicle loss of control could result in a colli sion with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways Be attentive at all times and avoid driving when tired Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs including prescrip tion or over the counter drugs which may cause drowsiness Always wear your seat belt as out lined in the Safety Seats seat belts and supple mental restraint system section of this manual and also instruct your passengers to do so Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli sions and rollovers In a rollover crash an unbelted or improperly belted person is sig nificantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt 5 6 Starting and driving OFF ROAD RECOVERY While drivin
187. available through INFINITI dealers to assist in cold temperature starting The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20 F 7 C or lower To use the engine block heater 1 2 Turn the engine off Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3 wire cord 3 pronged_ extension Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 volt AC VAC outlet The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 4 hours depending on outside temperatures to properly warm the engine coolant Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on Before starting the engine unplug and prop erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts 5 56 Starting and driving AWARNING e Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2 pronged adapter You can be se riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection Disconnect and properly store the en gine block heater cord before starting the engine Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury Use a heavy duty 3 wire 3 pronged ex tension cord rated for at least 10 A Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 VAC outlet Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded out
188. ay The brightness can then be adjusted using the INFINITI controller If no operation is done within 10 seconds the display will return to the previous display Press and hold the 2 OFF button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off Press the button again to turn the display on 4 18 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems REARVIEW MONITOR When the shift selector is shifted into the R Reverse position the monitor display shows the view directly to the rear of the vehicle AWARNING The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground The RearView Monitor is a convenience but itis not a substitute for proper back ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly e Objects viewed in the RearView Moni tor differ from actual distance because a wide angle lens is used Make sure that the lift gate is securely closed when backing up e Do not put anything on the rearview camera The rearview camera is in stalled beside the license plate light When washing the vehicle with high pressure water be sure not to spray it around the camera Otherwise water may enter the camera unit causing wa ter condensation on the lens a mal func
189. battery is in another vehicle A CAUTION 8 Replace the vent caps if so equipped Be position the two vehicles to bring their bat e Al t E sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover teries near each other ea A ele the vent holes as it may be contaminated and negative to body ground for Wihconesueccd Do not allow the two vehicles to touch example strut mounting bolt engine lift bracket etc not to the battery 2 Apply the parking brake Move the shift se mete a lector to P Park Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems lights heater air condi tioner etc In case of emergency 6 9 PUSH STARTING AWARNING Do not push start this vehicle The three way catalyst may be damaged A CAUTION Automatic transmission models cannot be push started or tow started Attempt ing to do so may cause transmission damage 6 10 Incase of emergency IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS AWARNING Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire To avoid the danger of being scalded never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot When the radiator or coolant reser voir cap is removed pressurized hot water will spurt out possibly causing serious injury Do not open the hood if steam is com ing out If your vehicle is overheating indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading and the illumin
190. beep sounds to warn you However when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle doors can be locked with an other Intelligent Key A CAUTION After locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles or the rear liftgate opener switch When locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be fore operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been de tected by the Intelligent Key system Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci dentally locked in the vehicle lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system When the driver s side door is open the doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds NOTE The doors may not lock when the Intelli gent Key is in the same hand that is oper ating the request switch to lock the door Put the intelligent key in a purse pocket or your other hand A CAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the glove box or a storage
191. bin When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the door pockets When the Intelligent Key is placed in side or near metallic materials Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 Unlocking doors 1 Carry the Intelligent Key 2 Push the door handle request switch 3 The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once 4 Push the door handle request switch again within 30 seconds to unlock all doors For power lift gate opening 1 Carry the intelligent key 2 Press the power lift gate button 3 The power lift gate will open 3 12 Pre driving checks and adjustments If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors that door may not be unlocked Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door If the door does not unlock after return ing the door handle push the door handle re quest switch to unlock the door All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch Opening any door Pushing the ignition switch The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow ing operations Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the remote controller S
192. bin in the Instruments and controls section Remove the cargo area storage bin cover See Cargo area storage bin in the Instru ments and controls section In case of emergency 6 3 3 Unscrew the rotating mechanism A coun 4 Assemble the two straight pieces of the jack terclockwise until loosened on cradle Re rod Find the oval shaped opening above move the Jack the middle of the license plate Pass the T shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it toward the spare tire winch located directly above the spare tire A CAUTION Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown 6 4 Incase of emergency Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle Seat the T shaped end of the jack rod into the T shaped opening of the tire winch Ap ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare tire Once the spare tire is completely lowered reach under the vehicle remove the retainer chain and carefully slide the tire from under the rear of the vehicle A CAUTION Be sure to center the spare tire suspend ing plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire AWARNING Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack If it is nec
193. bing devices should not be used on the side air bag or cur tain and rollover air bag systems e The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identi fication When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Seat belts with pretensioners Front seats AWARNING The pretensioners cannot be reused af ter activation They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but a pretensioner is not activated be sure to have the pre tensioner system checked and if nec essary replaced by you INFINITI dealer No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system This is to pre vent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by an INFINITI dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by an INFINITI dealer Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 65 If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact an INFINITI dealer I
194. by Macrovision Corporation and other right holders is adopted for this system This copyright protected technology cannot be used without a permit from Macrovision Corporation It is limited to be personal use etc as long as the permit from Macrovision Corporation is not issued Modifying or disassembling is prohibited Dolby digital is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Inc Dolby and the double D mark are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Inc e DTS and DTS Digital Surround are regis tered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Parental level parental control DVDs with the parental control setting can be played with this system Please use your own judgement to set the parental control with the system Disc selection You can play the following disc formats with the DVD drive e DVD VIDEO e VIDEO CD CD DA Conventional Compact Disc CD with MP3 WMA cannot be played Use DVDs with a region code 1 DVDs with region code ALL or 1 will operate in the DVD entertainment system The region code is dis played as a small symbol printed on the top of the DVD This vehicle installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a region code other than 1 or ALL Toggles on and off Display settings Front display To adjust the front display mode press the SET TING button while the DVD is being played select the Display key with the INFINITI control ler and then press
195. c operation press the window switch down only driver s side shown to the second detent and release it it need not be held The window auto matically opens all the way To stop the window lift the switch up while the window is opening To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation pull the switch up to the second detent and release it it need not be held To stop the window press the switch down while the window is closing Auto reverse function The auto reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc curs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the window If the vehicle s battery is disconnected replaced or jump started the power window auto reverse function may not operate properly If this occurs please contact the dealer to re initialize the power window auto reverse system If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing the window will be immediately low ered Instruments and controls 2 49 POWER VENT WINDOWS Use the vent window switch located on the driv er s side
196. cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area Secure any items in the cargo area Your child could be seri ously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could occur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR Doing so will exceed the GVWR AWARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could oc cur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause per sonal injury Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer br
197. ce of the Gracenote Database on the Internet may be stopped without prior notice for maintenance gracenote Ld End User License Agreement USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW Gracenote MusicID Terms of Use This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Soft ware enables this application to do online disc identification and obtain music related informa tion including name artist track and title infor mation Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other func tions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT TED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio late these restrictions If your license terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves
198. certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop Properly secure all cargo to help pre vent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury 1 14 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Folding the front passenger s seatback To fold the front passenger s seatback flat for extra storage length when transporting long items A Move the seat to the rearmost position by pushing the switch backward until the seat comes to a stop Then recline the seatback as far forward as possible using the recline switch Lift up on the latch located on the upper corner of the seatback to release the back of the seat 2 Once the seatback is released it will enable you to fold the front passenger seatback flat over the seat cushion To return the front passenger s seat to a seating position lift up on the seatback and push it up to an upright position Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained AWARNING If you fold the front passenger s seat back flat forward to carry longer ob jects be sure this cargo is properly se cured and not near an air bag In a crash an inflating air bag might force that object toward a person This could cause severe injury or even dea
199. ch also dials the number 5 To pause push the TALK switch 6 Say Dial 7 The system makes a call to 011 81 111 222 3333 NOTE Any digit input format is available in the International Number input process as well as the special characters such as star pound and plus INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE The Alternate Command Mode enables control of the Audio Climate Control and Display sys tems as well as additional commands for the Vehicle Information Phone and Navigation sys tems With this setting active the system does not announce or display the available commands at each step When Alternate Command Mode is activated an expanded list of commands can be used after pushing the TALK f switch Under this mode the screen for Standard Mode commands is not available on the display Please review the expanded command list available when this mode is active as some Standard Mode com mands are replaced Please see examples of Alternate Command Mode screens Please note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and ways of speaking each command are increased You can turn this mode ON or OFF When this mode is activated the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 93 Ge Settings gt Olhers i Adjust yore recognition settings
200. cified ca pacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components Before taking a long trip or whenever you heavily load your vehicle use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level e For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION size if so equipped PNEU ET INFORMATION DE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL FRONT REAR OA swoneoereaces tome X man X aiie THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XX kg OR XX lbs LE POIDS COMBINE D OCCUPANTS ET DE CARGAISON NE DEVRAIT JAMAIS EXC DER XX ok OU XX Ibs ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE TAILLE DU PNEU D ORIGINE PRESSION DE GONFLAGE A FRO1U Suuueenaneermepsrennes PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI INFORMATION POUR D AUTRES PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI Wanka SPARE TIRE AU MANUEL DU 6 rt DE SECOURS PXXX XXRXX XXX kPa XX PSI CONDUCTEUR Tire and loading information label 4 Cold tire pressure Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 Q Seating capacity The maximum num ber of occupants that can be seated in the
201. cking engine coolant level 8 7 Checking engine oil level 8 8 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Engine cooling system 8 7 EDGING Oll eiea e Oot w eae oe 8 8 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Engine oil viscosity a aoaaa aaa 9 5 Engine serial number 9 10 Engine specifications 9 7 Starting the engine 5 12 Engine oil pressure gauge 2 6 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 10 Enter DUON se perpres ee poe oe pi 4 2 Event data recorders a saaa aaa 9 32 Exhaust gas Carbon monoxide 5 2 Eyeglass case 0 6 6 a98 w Be we be ac 2 37 E Flashers See hazard warning flasher switch 2 29 Prat a segoe a ee oS a a Hom ee e 6 2 Floor mat positioning aid 7 5 Fluid Brake fluid e o auceu uw dee he eS a 8 12 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants oaoa 9 2 Engine coolant 4 4 4 baw aoe a we 8 7 Engine Olli s sg aira i amp a So ew a 8 8 Power steering fluid 8 11 Window washer fluid 8 12 F M V S S certification label 9 10 Fog light switch 244 2 29 Front air bag system See supplemental restraint system 1 59 Front seats koe bd ee oe Pe ee 1 2 Front sonar system 2 33 5 53 Fuel Capacities and recommended tueliubncanis ss
202. climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer When the engine temperature reaches a certain level The engine coolant temperature gauge will move toward the H position Engine power may be reduced The air conditioning cooling function may be automatically turned OFF for a short time the blower will continue to operate Engine power and under some conditions ve hicle speed will decrease Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but the vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed The transmission will downshift or upshift as it reaches prescribed shift points You can also shift manually As driving conditions change and engine coolant temperature is reduced vehicle speed can be increased using the accelerator pedal and air conditioning cooling function will automatically be turned back ON If 1 The engine coolant temperature is not re duced 2 The air conditioning cooling function does not turn back ON 3 The engine oil pressure warning engine coolant temperature high indicator il luminates this may indicate a malfunction Move the vehicle off the road in a safe area and allow the engine to cool If after check ing the oil and coolant the remains on do not continue to drive and call an INFINITI dealer The malfunction indicator lamp may also come ON You do not need to have your vehicle towed unless it remains on but hav
203. covery device manufacturer s instructions Attach the tow strap to the towing hook In case of emergency 6 13 A WARNING e Stand clear of a stuck vehicle e Do not spin your tires at high speed This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged A CAUTION Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle or the towing hooks if so equipped Otherwise the vehicle body will be damaged Use the towing hook if so equipped only to free a vehicle stuck in sand snow mud etc Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the tow ing hook The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle Never pull the hook at an angle Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle 6 14 Incase of emergency Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the sus pension steering brake or cooling systems Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery Rocking a stuck vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use the following procedure 1 Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys tem 2 Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions 3 Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front
204. ct a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level 9 4 Technical and consumer information roads have an INFINITI dealer correct the condition Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle for which INFINITI is not responsible Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock after run and or overheating which may cause excessive fuel Consumption or engine damage If any of the above symptoms are en countered have your vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer However now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills This is not a cause for concern because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load A CAUTION Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline e U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region API certification mark ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS S
205. curs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position your vehicle s battery could be come discharged Headlight beam select C To select the high beam function push the lever forward The high beam lights come on and the 20 light illuminates 2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam 3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the D or 2 position the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes After the headlights automatically turn off with the headlight switch in the PG or position the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes if the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position and then turned to the P9 or 2 position A CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time you should turn the head light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Headlight aiming control Depending on the number of occupants in the vehicle and the load it is carrying the headlight axis may be higher than desired If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road the headlights may di rectly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle The light axis can be lowered with the
206. cy Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once Is called a multisession ID3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist album title encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album Artist Track title line on the display Windows and Windows Media are regis tered trademarks and trademarks of the Mi crosoft Corporation in the United States of America and or other countries CompactFlash is a registered trademark of the SanDisk Corporation in the United States of America and or other countries FOLDER MP3 or WMA WHA1078 Playback order chart Playback order Music playback order of a CD CF with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 29 lf there is a file in the top level of the disc Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desire
207. d Failure to follow these instruc tions can reduce the effectiveness of the ARMRESTS head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision To use the armrests pull them down to the rest ing position A Stowed position Resting position Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 7 The illustration shows the seating positions Components equipped with head restraints All of the head restraints are adjustable 1 Head restraint A Indicates the seating position is equipped with 2 Adjustment notches a head restraint 3 Lockkriob 4 Stalks 1 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system ch LRS0888 LRS0889 Adjustment To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of the seat occupant s ears Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 Ca LRS0890 Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable head restraints 1 Pull the head restraint up to the highest position 2 Push and hold the lock knob 3 Remove the head restraint from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Install and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating posi tion Install 1 Align the head restraint stalks wit
208. d However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS A CAUTION Tire chains cables should not be installed on P275 60R20 size tires Installation of the tire chains cables on P275 60R20 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle If you plan to use tire chains cables you should install P265 70R18 size tires on your vehicle Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before installing tire chains When installing tire chains make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s suggestions Use only SAE class S chains Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance Vehicles that can use Class S chains are de signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device tire chains or cables The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size Other types may damage your vehicle Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufac turer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or
209. d driving section of this manual Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident check for the cause and have it corrected imme diately Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold with the engine off Check the lines for proper attachment leaks cracks etc Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt insects leaves etc that may have accumulated Make sure the hoses have no cracks deformation rot or loose connections Underbody The underbody is frequently ex posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody otherwise rust may form on the floor pan frame fuel lines and exhaust system At the end of winter the underbody should be thor oughly flushed with plain water in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated See the Appearance and care section of this manual Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following
210. d order 4 30 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Specification chart Supported media CD CD R CD RW CF CD CD R CD RW Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Apple ISO Romeo Joliet ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported CompactFlash card FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 5 Sampling frequency a 8 kHz 48 kHz Supported Bitrate o rate 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 versions 1 WMA 2 WMA7 WMA8 WMA9 Sampling a 32 kHz 48 kHz Bitrate o rate 32 kbps 192 kbps VBR 4 ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 VER 2 4 MP3 only Tag information WMA tag WMA only Folder levels Folder levels 8 Folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder Text character number limitation 128 characters 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian 05 ES UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 3 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed 4 When VBR files are played the playback time may not be displayed correctly Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 31 Troubleshooting guide C T Check if there is condensation inside the player
211. d table of contents 0 7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS ss pm ee H 0 8 Illustrated table of contents Battery P 8 13 Fuse fusible link box P 8 23 Transmission dipstick P 8 11 Engine oil filler cap P 8 8 Brake fluid reservoir P 8 12 Windshield washer fluid reservoir P 8 12 Air cleaner P 8 17 Drive belt location P 8 15 Radiator cap P 8 7 Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 11 Engine oil dipstick P 8 8 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 7 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS Anti lock Braking Engine oil pressure System ABS warn xs low engine coolant ing light temperature high warning light Automatic transmis owe 4WD warning light sion check warning C3 model Malfunction indica 2 14 i tor lamp MIL ign IOR Low fuel warning 2 Automatic transmis light Security indicator 2 14 light Slip indicator light 2 14 2 11 11 sion park warning E i Low tire pressure 2 11 light EER warning light model AN Master warning light 2 12 Turn signal hazard 2 15 indicator lights 2 13 15 13 Vehicle Dynamic 2 Control VDC off indicator light Seat belt warning light and chime Charge warning 2 Supplemental air 2 light bag warning light Check suspension warning light Illustrated table of contents 0 9 MEMO 0 10 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety S
212. d the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or its Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear The GVWR and GAWR are located on the F M V S S label located on the driver s door pillar For more information regarding GVWR and GAWR refer to Vehicle loading information in the Technical and con sumer information section later in this manual The crossbars can be adjusted forward and backward Loosen the thumbwheel 1 and ad just the crossbar to the desired position Tighten the thumbwheel Place your luggage on the bars and secure the luggage with rope to the utility loops Do not place luggage on the side rails or tie rope directly to the side rails Always be sure the thumbwheels are fully tightened to keep the crossbar in place Do not use utility loops for any purpose other than securing luggage WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS AWARNING Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window Unattended chil dren could become involved in serious accidents The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the dri
213. damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL Engine oil with API Certification Mark Viscosity 5W 30 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendation in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual COLD TIRE PRESSURE See Tire and Loading Information label The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver s door For additional information see Wheels and tires in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCEDURE During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km of vehicle use follow the recommendations outlined in the BREAK IN SCHEDULE information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual Follow these recommendations for the future re liability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life
214. death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi cal from the steering wheel or instru ment panel Always use the seat belts The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us age then inflates the air bags Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor pressure sensor that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions This sensor is only used in this seat Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci dent See Front Passenger air bag and status light later in this section Keep hands on the outside of the steer ing wheel Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 53 Sit upright and well back 1 54 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to
215. dicator light in the In struments and controls section Indicator light If a malfunction occurs in the system the SLIP and Be indicator lights come on in the instrument panel If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO the Be indicator light will come on and the VDC system will be turned off See Transfer case shifting procedures earlier in this section As long as these indicator lights are on the traction control function is canceled If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy namic Control system off using the VDC OFF switch most VDC and Traction Control System TCS functions will be turned off The SLIP indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected The ABS will still operate with the VDC system off When the VDC system is operating you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working prop erly The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction Starting and driving 5 51 AWARNING The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is designed to help improve driving stabil ity but does not prevent accidents due to abru
216. dow washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water 2 24 Instruments and controls REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH 0 y LIC1173 To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors Start the engine and push the rear window de froster switch The rear window defroster indica tor light on the display screen comes on Push the switch again to turn the defroster off The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window be careful not to scratch or dam age the rear window defroster HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS A WARNING Z HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on they produce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disassemble Always have your xe non headlights replaced at an INFINITI dealer Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional head lights If they are not correctly aimed they might temporarily b
217. dset Transfer the call to the cellular phone Mute Mute your voice to the person Keypad Brings up a keypad enter digits when needed For example entering your PIN number for voice mail NOTE Pushing the TALK l4 switch on the steering wheel during a call allows num bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec ognition Cancel Mute This will appear after the Mute key is touched Mute will be cancelled To adjust the person s voice to be louder or quieter press the volume control switch located on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone This adjustment is also available in the SETTING mode 4 78 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Phone Cu Fil yo Ele R ose ent Gf k gt 0 03 Call in Progress XXXXXXX Kevpad H zp i XXXXXXXXXX ENDING A CALL To finish the call perform one of the following procedures Select the Hang up key on the Call in Progress display and press the ENTER but ton Push the SRE switch on the steering wheel When the Call in Progress screen is dis played press the PHONE button on the G Settings gt Phone instrument panel to hang up If any other screen is currently displayed press the PHONE button to display the Call in Progress screen first then press the Downloaded Phonebook PHONE button again to hang up Automatic Hold
218. e remote controller E STOP key Touch the E STOP key to stop playing the DVD To stop playing the DVD it is also possible to press the W button on the keypad of the remote controller Pl SKIP forward key Touch the P SKIP key to skip the chapter s of the disc forward The chapters will advance the number of times the PP SKIP key is touched Touch and hold the P gt SKIP key for more than 1 5 seconds to fast forward the disc When the PP SKIP key is released the disc will be played normally To skip the chapter s forward it is also possible to press the PPI button on the keypad of the remote controller dq SKIP rewind key Touch the 44 SKIP key to skip the chapter s of the disc backward The chapters will go back the number of times the M4 SKIP key is touched Touch and hold the M4 SKIP key for more than 1 5 seconds to rewind the disc When the Ma SKIP key is released the disc will be played normally To skip the chapter s backward it is also pos sible to press the M4 button on the keypad of the remote controller DVD gt Settings Switch to DVD AUX DVD settings Touch the Settings key to adjust the following settings while playing a DVD When all the changes have been made press BACK button to save all the settings Switch to DVD AUX Switch the output source from the DVD drive to another d
219. e Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section 6 2 Incase of emergency AWARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting e Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions be low Stopping the vehicle 1 Safely move the vehicle off t
220. e SCreen ce eee ee eee 4 19 Da ek o says fara E E E 4 20 e dig S A ew adel E EE E E EE E T 4 21 Heater and air conditioner automatic 4 22 Automatic operation sssaaa cece eee 4 22 Manual operation svecceuuteeaececoenty ge vecvess 4 23 Operating UPS 242 enscadeceknevenaveneaene gees 4 24 Rear seat air conditioner 0 000 cece eee eae 4 24 CORNOS ae AA ERA A E ed 4 25 Servicing air Conditioners 3 sesseedsdeee swe anveees 4 25 Audio SYSTE tsetera Meese uit se reta eT Meweda hews 4 26 RAO e roeren aeaa AEA E a E E EEEO EE E 4 26 FM radio reception 2 ieacececut seats peedhenes 4 26 AM radio reception 220020e cece eee 4 26 Satellite radio reception 0eeee eee 4 27 Audio operation precautions 0000 eee 4 27 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD Payel pcceescettaietteetecstedees tetceaeesede 4 34 CompactFlash CF player operation 4 39 Music Box Hard Drive audio system 4 41 CD CF CompactFlash care and cleaning 4 50 Steering wheel switch for audio control 4 51 Rear audio controls kx de Gaesetees Cees oe ate 4 53 AIICNNAis ios a2hdseateeabaaeeedee takbcaanes dei 4 54 INFINITI mobile entertainment system MES if so SOUNDER deccdudtentoneend obese sadneeens 4 54 Digital video disc DVD player controls 4 56 Remote CONUOL ccstgecctacwweeecnnese tae ase a out 4 57 FIID COWN SCICCNs cercas veecntscd
221. e and voice recognition systems 4 35 CD MP3 display mode While listening to a CD or an MP3 WMA CD certain text might be able to be displayed when CD encoded with text is being used Depending on how the CD or MP3 WMA CD is encoded the following text might be able to be displayed by touching the Text key Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed File displays the name of the file currently playing Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name CD gt Text Folder XXXXXXX File XXXXXXX MpP3 Song Album Artist XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name e Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artist s name e Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur rently playing Track displays the name of the song on the CD currently playing Some of this text or modes might not display while playing a regular CD Press the BACK button to exit the CD text display screen 4 36 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM SAT band select Pressing the RADIO AM FM button will change the band as follows AM gt FM or SAT When the RADIO AM FM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON When the RADIO
222. e displayed When driving uphill or rounding curves the fuel in the tank shifts which may momentarily change the display Average fuel economy MPG or L 100 km The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1 3 mi 500 m After a reset or connecting the battery cables the display might show Resetting fuel economy The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0 Press the INFO button and select the Fuel Economy key then select the Reset key using the INFINITI controller and press the EN TER button Information gt Fuel Economy Rec 8 00 sacx Reset Interval Latest Fuel economy record Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key then select the View key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER but ton The average fuel consumption history will be displayed in a graph form along with the average fuel for the previous Reset to Reset period Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 7 8 00 eck Information gt Tire Pressure Tire pressure information To display tire pressure information press the INFO button then select the Tire Pressure key using the INFINITI controller and press the EN TER button Pressure indication in psi on the screen indi cates that the pressure is being measured Af
223. e ignition switch is pushed but not turned No key warning Intelligent Key model This warning illuminates following two condi tions 1 When the ignition switch is pushed and the Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the system If this warning illuminates you can not start the engine 2 18 Instruments and controls Check for the following causes and perform the assigned remedies The battery of the Intelligent Key carried with you is discharged completely Re place the battery with a new one The Intelligent Key carried with you is not registered to the system Use the regis tered Intelligent Key You do not have an Intelligent Key with you Carry an Intelligent Key with you 2 When the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position A chime will also sound Lock warning Intelligent Key model This warning illuminates and a chime sounds if the ignition switch has been in the ACC or ON position and then placed in the OFF position Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the warning and chime will turn off Refer to Shift P warning in this section for additional information SHIFT P warning Intelligent Key model This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift selector is in any position other than P Park position Also a chime sounds when the ignitio
224. e it inspected soon by an INFINITI dealer See Warning Indicator Lights and Audible reminders in the Instruments and Controls section of this manual AWARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a col lision Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of the road ina safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se rious damage to the engine almost imme diately Such damage is not covered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do So AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AWARNING e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P Park or N Neu tral to R Reverse or L Low Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident e Cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up Never shift to P Park or R Reverse while the vehicle is moving This could cause an accident A CAUTION When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the v
225. e light still remains on and or the en gine will not start see an INFINITI dealer for service as soon as possible Please bring all INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Sys tem keys that you have when visiting your INFINITI dealer for service WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed C Intermittent intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward A Slower or Faster Also the intermit tent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed For example when the vehicle speed is high the intermittent operation speed will be faster NOTE You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func tion Refer to Comfort amp convenience set tings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems sec tion later in this manual 2 Low continuous low speed operation 3 High continuous high speed operation Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep opera tion of the wiper Pull the lever toward you 8 to operate the washer The wiper will also operate several times AWARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wa
226. e passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used For front passenger air bag status light operation see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual HO High beam indicator light blue This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated Instruments and controls 2 13 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction ENGINE SERVICE SOON The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing or if the vehicle runs out of fuel Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons 11 4 liters of fuel in the fuel tank After a few driving trips the ENGINE light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys tem inspection maintenance test See Readi ness for inspection maintenance I M
227. e systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out of position occupants However all of the information cautions and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted They may not inflate in certain side collisions Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers As a result certain vehicle movements for example during severe off roading may cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag operation When the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly Side air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants Curtain and rollover air bags help to c
228. eane eens ace 4 57 Before operating the DVD mobile entertainment system 0 cece eee eee 4 58 Playing a digital versatile disc DVD 4 60 Remote control operation 02 5 4 64 Care and maintenance 002 0ee eee 4 66 How to handle the DVD 0005 4 67 Call volume 000c cece eee ee eee eee neces 4 81 Car phone OF OB fadiosenursetkwacceteiedeeaneses 4 69 INFINITI Voice Recognition System 4 82 Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System 4 70 INFINITI Voice Recognition Standard Mode 4 82 Reg latory INIOFMALION science Soa ooeeeie ee sess 4 72 Using the system 00cc cece cece eee eeee 4 84 Voice COMMANS eee eee ee eee eee eee 4 73 Before Stanger ses rsa treswed i erek bacewee en 4 84 Pairing procedure 16 6 sees eee e cence ees 4 73 Giving voice commands 02eeeeeeees 4 85 Phonebook scerrissssrirsrsirisssrriris trinir 4 74 INFINITI Voice Recognition Alternate Mokpg a Callacvecetenkeacnaitnqanenuteeeememe de 4 76 Command Mode ooo LLL L LLL LLL LLL 4 93 Receiving a call l a 4 77 Using the systeM cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 100 During COON ote oo ee at ea as Bee ee 4 78 Speaker Adaptation Function cceccece 4 102 Ending Cdlliccnideccaeda attev teshaschdesaae 4 78 Troubleshooting guide sceeseeeeeees 4 105 Phone SOWING dcuccedeeteescedt ent eccesebencere 4 79 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS
229. ear in the vehicle information display Approach warning If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if The chime sounds The vehicle ahead detection and set dis tance indicator blink The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there Is a short distance between vehicles Some examples are When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is in creasing When the accelerator pedal is depressed overriding the system When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle The warning chime will not sound when your vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or moving slowly Starting and driving 5 31 5 32 Starting and driving NOTE The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects some reflectors 1 which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes or on the side of the road This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle The ICC sensor may detect these reflectors when the vehicle is driven on winding roads hilly roads or when en tering or exiting a curve The ICC sensor may also detec
230. eatly increases Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child s arm A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap shoulder belt Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers When selecting any booster seat keep the following points in mind Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system Make sure the child s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat The seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears For example if a low back booster seat 1 is chosen the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears If the seatback is lower than the center of the child s ears a high back booster seat 2 should be used If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child Always follow all recommended pro cedures Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint s
231. eats seat belts and supplemental restraint system CAS ET E E E E TE cies 1 2 Front power seat adjustment 0005 1 3 2nd row captain s chair adjustment f S0 QUIPPER scerrosrsrs isiro tasnia EAk 1 4 2nd row bench seat adjustment fso egupped oxi cn ceua deeds scree sere iei 1 5 ANIGSIS si 0cebeecadredase5eGies sens odanneeeene 1 7 Head restraints vcascdvi Getecccadeangegde setae 1 7 Adjustable headrest if so equipped 1 11 Flexible SCAUNG os eure tccupueseasudue cceeeeeane 1 14 3rd row power folding seats 1 18 CAL OCS pica arents rei ia E ENNE RE sp Hage eas 1 20 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 20 Pregnant women 24 64200620cceedeenkecceoneusecs 1 23 Wired PElsONss c22cueeete eye ene TEREE ee tsens 1 23 Three point type seat belt with retractor 1 23 Seat belt extenders 0 00 c eee eee eee 1 29 Seat belt maintenance 00eeee eee 1 29 CWI SAIC sou redar ner iepa EER Gaede wens 1 30 WANS sy tea ae ode E eck be wiw a S 1 30 SMa CHING isn civarsekGiaeedrcd ae Re wee ee oeee we 1 30 Larder CHilgren wu2enes2 ogee teneatenevarcaeeents 1 31 Child restais esseere ierre eaea E ERRE A Precautions on child restraints 4 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System s an cece eee eee nes Rear facing child restraint installation using LATOR ceheccasenees toaceeherdes seeanen bes s Rear facing child restraint install
232. ection Be careful when passing other vehicles Passing while towing a trailer requires con siderably more distance than normal pass ing Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans mission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently This could cause the brakes to overheat resulting in reduced braking efficiency Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer Anticipate stops and brake gradually INFINITI recommends that the cruise control not be used while towing a trailer Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers Obey the local speed limits Check your hitch trailer wiring harness con nections and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles 80 km of travel and at every break When launching a boat don t allow the wa ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quently For additional informat
233. ectly worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis tance away from the steering wheel instrument panel and door finishers See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational 1 52 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Sit upright and well back AWARNING The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower severity fron tal collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front air bags inflate with great force Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag Sys tem if you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of posi tion in any way you are at greater risk of injury or
234. ed position firmly pull the belt and release it Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor 3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown 4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three point seat belts have two modes of operation Emergency Locking Retractor ELR Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 24 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts See Child re straints later in this section for more information The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation During normal seat belt use by an occupant the ALR mode should not be activated If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten
235. ehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly Parking brake break in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and or drum rotors are replaced in order to assure the best brake performance Starting and driving 5 49 This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by an INFINITI dealer ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS AWARNING e The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot pre vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remem ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping dis tances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow covered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you Ultimately the driver is respon sible for safety Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness When replacing tires install the specified size of tires on all four wheels 5 50 Starting and driving When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa tion
236. ehicle by de pressing the accelerator pedal The foot brake should be used for this purpose Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of control The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation Starting and driving 5 13 The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment Starting the vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P Park position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector into a driving gear 3 Release the foot brake then gradually start the vehicle in motion The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P Park to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear posi tions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF or ACC position 5 14 Starting and driving eJ Q EJ To move the shift selector Shift while depressing the brake pedal gt Shift without depressing brake pedal Shifting After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector out of the P Park position AWARNI
237. electing the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants earlier in this section INFINITI recommends the use of an en ergy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API certification or Interna tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval API service symbol Committee ILSAC certification and SAE vis cosity standard These oils have the API certifica tion mark on the front of the container Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage Oil additives INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil ad ditives The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature Because of this it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper ated before the next oil change Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage Selecting the correct oil filter Your new INFINITI vehicle is equipped with a high quality genuine NISSAN oil
238. els 3 After the wheel blocks are in place slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab sorb the vehicle load 4 Apply the parking brake 5 Shift the transmission into P Park 6 Make sure the gf indicator light if so equipped indicates the transfer case is in 4H 4L or 2H and that the ATP light is off If the cep indicator light is flashing or the ATP light is ON make sure the transmission is in P Park AT and turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H See Automatic transmission park warning light in the Instruments and controls section and Using four wheel drive in the Starting and driving section 7 Turn off the engine To drive away 1 If gt Start the vehicle Apply and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into gear Release the parking brake Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks Apply and hold the brake pedal 7 Have someone retrieve and store the blocks While going downhill the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de crease overall stability Therefore to main tain adequate control reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descend ing a hill as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating Shifting to a lower gear instead provides engine brak ing and reduces the need to brake as fre quently If the engine coolant temperature
239. elt with pretensioner 10 Satellite sensors 11 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag modules INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System front seats This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI Ad vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U S regu lations It is also permitted in Canada However all of the information cautions and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 59 The driver supplemental front impact air bag Is located in the center of the steering wheel The passenger supplemental front impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions although they may in flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper front air bag system opera tion The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage inflators It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor the Air bag Control Unit ACU seat belt buckle sensors occupant clas sification sensor pressure sensor and passen ger seat belt tension sensor Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt
240. em may not detect a vehicle ahead In some road or traffic conditions a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking You may need to control the distance from other vehicles using the accelerator pedal Al ways Stay alert and avoid using the ICC system when it is not recommended in this section Vehicle to vehicle distance mode operation Always pay attention to the operation of the ve hicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance The Intelligent Cruise Control ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles following distance or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances The vehicle to vehicle distance control mode uses a sensor 1 located on the front of the vehicle to detect vehicles ahead The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the reflectors on a vehicle ahead Therefore if the sensor cannot detect the reflector of the vehicle ahead the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot detect the signals When the reflector is positioned high on the vehicle trailer etc When the reflector on the vehicle ahead is missing damaged or covered When the reflector is covered with dirt snow and road spray When the snow or road spray from other vehicles reduces the sensor s visibility When dense exhau
241. en installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child ina sudden stop or collision Also it can change the operation of the front pas senger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section When installing a child restraint system in the rear center position both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured See Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 39 WRS0256 Rear facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats 1 Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the restraint manufacturer s instructions WRS0761 Rear facing step 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing 1 40 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental re
242. en the ignition switch is placed in the ON position INFINITI Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the 4 switch is pressed before the initializa tion completes the display will show the mes sage Phonetic data downloaded Please wait or a beep sounds Before starting To get the best performance from INFINITI Voice Recognition observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands cor rectly When the climate control is in the AUTO mode the fan speed decreases automati cally for easy recognition Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words 4 100 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Giving voice commands 1 Press and release the CS on the steering wheel switch located Sy Voice Recognition w w Dial Number w Phonebook amp To show additional commands say Help 2 A list of commands appears on the screen and the system announces Please say a command from the displayed list or say Help to show all commands After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from 2 to B speak a command Once a comm
243. ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc Bluetooth U S A and licensed to Xanavi Informatics Corporation VOICE COMMANDS You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System features using the INFINITI Voice Recognition system For more details see INFINITI Voice Recognition System later in this section Phone Till C ee C co Call Phonebook Hi Pair phone foun Se PAIRING PROCEDURE 1 Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel or the f4 switch on the steering wheel and select the Pair phone key on the display using the INFINITI controller Then press the ENTER button NOTE If a phone is already paired with the sys tem Step 1 will not work To pair another phone press the SETTING button then se lect the Phone key and press the ENTER button Scroll to the bottom of the list and select the Bluetooth Setup key and press the ENTER button Select the Pair Phone key and press the ENTER button then fol low the instructions in Step 2 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 73 U Settings gt Phone Settings gt Pair Phone Settings gt Pai
244. engine axle or other parts could be damaged INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position Drive at moderate speeds on the highway Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking Maintain a safe distance behind other ve hicles Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions On level roads shift into high gear as soon as possible Avoid unnecessary engine idling Keep your engine tuned up Follow the recommended periodic mainte nance schedule Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres sure Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Keep the front wheels in correct alignment Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy Use the air conditioner only when necessary Esc USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD When cruising at highway speeds it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag A WARNING For 4WD equipped vehicles do not at A CAUTION e Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO For vehicles equipped with E use 4H or 4L position only when necessary Four wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running Doing so
245. ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in INFINITI vehicles If any driveability problems such as engine stall ing and difficult hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate blend fuels immediately change to a non oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE Take care not to spill gasoline during refu eling Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage Technical and consumer information 9 3 E 85 fuel E 85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Do not use E 85 in your vehicle U S government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region Aftermarket fuel additives INFINITI does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives for example fuel injec tor cleaner octane booster intake valve deposit removers etc which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent heavy spark knock Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise If se vere this can lead to engine damage If you dete
246. ent 4 8 28 C Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants o oo a a Captain s chair adjustment 2nd row Car phone or CBradio 4 69 Cargo light ssa soe dm amp 85h Dae wwe bs 2 54 Cargonels 1482 oe heh com ed Gao Sw a 2 45 Cargo See vehicle loading information 9 12 CD care and cleaning 4 50 CD player See audio system 4 37 Child restraint with top tether strap 1 36 Child restraints 1 30 1 30 1 31 1 33 Precautions on child restraints 1 31 1 39 1 44 1 49 Top tether strap anchor point locations 1 36 Child safety rear door lock 3 6 Chimes audible reminders 2 15 Cleaning exterior and interior 7 2 Clos aicad oe ae REEE ee 2 34 4 35 models with navigation system 4 13 CIOGRSCl a a wim agus es bales be oe wo 4 13 C M V S S certification label 9 10 Cold weather driving 5 54 Compact disc CD player 4 37 CompactFlash CF player 4 39 Console box 00 4 2 36 2 42 Control panel buttons 4 2 Brightness contrast button 4 18 Enter button se a ano e amp eae bee 4 2 Setting button 00 4 11 Startup SCreeNn v2 sa ed a 4 5 Controls Audio controls steering wheel 4 51 Heater and air conditioner controls 4 22 Rear audio controls 4 53 Rear seat airconditioner
247. enu Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cycle through each available audio track ANGLE Press the ANGLE button to call up the camera angle menu Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cycle through each available angle CLEAR Press the CLEAR button to clear all numeric inputs if actuated prior to expiration of the 3 second timer NUMERIC KEYPAD 0 9 amp gt 10 Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly access disc chapters titles or tracks by inputting their numeric value Use the gt 10 button to input numbers greater than or equal to 10 Up to 3 digits can be inputted when selecting the chapter title track number The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons will continuously shift the previously input number to the left The chapter title track number will be automati cally selected if valid based on media content if 3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs The operator can cancel the input chapter title track number by actuating the CLEAR control prior to the expiration of the 3 second timer These functions can be used only for the DVD discs which correspond to them CARE AND MAINTENANCE Use a lightly dampened lint free cloth to clean the surfaces of your INFINITI Mobile Entertainment System DVD player face screen remote control etc Do not attempt to use the system in extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C or above 158 F 70 C Do not attempt to operate
248. er gency use See specific instructions un der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual 6 8 Incase of emergency JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery the instructions and precautions below must be fol lowed If the battery of a vehicle equipped with INFINITI Intelligent Key is discharged the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position even using the mechanical key or the valet key Connect the jumper cables to another vehicle as in the case of a discharged battery and then the ignition switch can be moved from the LOCK posi tion Then jump start the vehicle AWARNING If done incorrectly jump starting can lead to a battery explosion resulting in severe injury or death It could also damage your vehicle Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or painted surfaces Battery fluid is a cor rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns If the fluid should come into contact with anything imme diately flush the contacted area with water Keep battery out of the reach of children The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle Whenever working on or near a battery always wear sui
249. er it detects a vehicle in front of you 3 Set distance indicator Displays the selected distance between ve hicles set with the DISTANCE switch 4 Indicates your vehicle 5 CRUISE indicator light The light illuminates in the vehicle informa tion display and indicates that the ON OFF switch is ON 6 Set vehicle speed indicator Indicates the set vehicle speed For Canadian models the speed will be indicated by km h CRUISE 19 Z MPH E ST WSD0216 System check display When the ignition switch is turned ON the dis play comes on as illustrated to check for a display malfunction and it turns off when the engine is started ACCEL RES CRUISE SS COAST SET rk Operating vehicle to vehicle distance control mode To turn on the cruise control push the ON OFF switch 1 on The CRUISE indicator light set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on and they are on a standby state for setting A CAUTION To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control make sure to turn the ON OFF switch off when not using the Intelligent Cruise Control Starting and driving 5 27 ACCEL RES COAST SET ey c m MPH DU aS oHe Eine To set cruising speed accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Vehicle ahead detection indicator set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your veh
250. er of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems However they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to per form satisfactorily under off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns at high speeds As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Be sure to read the driving safety precautions later in this section TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you sho
251. erature Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSINGS INFINITI does not recommend the use of tire dressings Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub ber If a tire dressing is applied to the tires it may react with the coating and form a compound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint If you choose to use a tire dressing take the following precautions e Use a water based tire dressing The coat ing on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil based tire dressing Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread grooves where it would be difficult to remove Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel Make sure the tire dressing is com pletely removed from the tire tread grooves Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom mended by tire dressing manufacturer Appearance and care 7 3 CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth damp ened in mild soap solution then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required i
252. erial special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate amp Bluetooth 4 gracenote ae BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Xanavi Informatics Corporation Gracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote Inc The Gracenote logo and logo type and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote XM Radio requires subscription sold separately after first 90 days Not available in Alaska Hawaii or Guam For more information visit www xmradio com GD INFINITI 2009 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA INC All rights reserved No part of this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Nissan North America Inc Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre driving checks and adjustments Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical and consumer information na 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags seat belts and child restraints 0 2 Exterior front ak ene bes ceedee eee vbw obenddverweoeca et 0 3 Exterior Cal rs
253. es except the spare tire on the display screen The order of the tire pressure figures dis played on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position See Tire pressure information in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section For additional information see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section and Tire pressure monitoring system in the In case of emergency section AWARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the l
254. es boee8 8 7 Checking engine coolant level 005 8 7 Changing engine coolant 2 00 eeeee 8 8 ENGIN Ollie tewvteseetsenasepeseceeheaeeeuneaectas 8 8 Checking engine oil level 2 000 005 8 8 Changing engine oll 000 cece eee eee aes 8 9 Changing engine oil filter 0 2 00 8 10 5 speed automatic transmission fluid 8 11 Power steering fluid 00 ccc ee eee eee 8 11 Praka MWC scusem Canter edecemeeteaieneweeseusauns 8 12 Brake WMC 2 sas oo need canteen be dornewer eee resumed 8 12 Window washer fluid 20020e ee eee eee 8 12 Window washer fluid reservoir 2 0 8 12 BAN ely soar posse aes ee eee tee eoeeer oases 8 13 JUMP SING codecs eueheceeseen tench esas es 8 14 Variable voltage control system 8 15 DNGe Del ce esuctecesctycweeesecssceeceeenseeunct 8 15 Spark PUG reciia serri rE e E E kee erie 8 16 Replacing spark plugs 00e eee eee 8 16 Al cleg e seseceecieceuten oehbswecneeeseeusiubewe 8 17 In cabin MICIOMMelsceseiceiceudemesateeeeeeecws 8 17 Windshield wiper blades 02 022000 8 19 CICANING 4 lt 2 24408024ea00065050060Ra0 G0 Re Risi 8 19 EESTE ING lt 2 e E E E E EE S cosas 8 19 E EA E E E E S 8 22 a e AT T EE TEE TEET 8 23 Engine COMPANMGEIN 2cseetcedsesdcesaceciene 8 23 Passenger compartment 00 eee eee 8 25 Battery replacement 002 0c ee eee eee 8
255. eset Average Speed Average speed driven MPH or km h since the last reset Resetting the trip computer Each item in the trip computer can be reset to O Select the Reset key on the item that needs to be reset using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button To reset all of the items in the trip computer select the Reset ALL key and press the ENTER button A confirmation screen will appear select the Yes key and press the ENTER button eee i Information gt Maintenance 8 00 sack 0 6000 12000 18000 n 1 i Reminder 2 EE a ae 6000 12000 18000 miles 24 Reminder 3 Sif Reminder 4 Maintenance items Press the INFO button and select the Mainte nance key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button the maintenance infor mation will be displayed on the screen 8 00 Graco 0 6000 12000 18000 e Distance T i Information gt Reminder 1 l interval OCH on zi Interval Reminder MMM 6000 12000 18000 miles TMU cna III Changing the maintenance interval Select one of the Reminder 1 4 keys using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER but ton to display the screen to change the mainte nance interval Select the Interval key using the INFINITI con troller and press the ENTER button Use the INFINITI controller to change the maintenance interval to accept the changes press the BACK button Mon
256. est way to transport your child There are three basic types of child restraint systems Rear facing child restraint Forward facing child restraint Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child s size Generally infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 Ibs 9 kg should be placed in rear facing child restraints Forward facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward facing child restraint AWARNING Infants and children need special protec tion The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fit ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use appropriate child restraints All U S states and Canadian provinces or terri tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children See Child Re straints later in this section A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH Lower Anchor and Teth ers for CHildren system or with the vehicle seat belt See Child Restraints section for more in formation INFINITI recommends that all pre teens and children be restrained in the rear seat Studies show tha
257. et speeds AWARNING Always drive carefully and attentively when using either cruise control mode Read and understand the Owner s Manual thoroughly before using the cruise con trol To avoid serious injury or death do not rely on the system to prevent acci dents or to control the vehicle s speed in emergency situations Do not use cruise control except in appropriate road and traffic conditions CRUISE ACCEL RES L COAST SET ON OEE T i MPH Barrie WSD0203 Vehicle to vehicle distance control mode Starting and driving 5 19 CRUISE ACCEL RES E COAST SET CANCEL ON QST WSD0204 Conventional fixed speed cruise control mode SELECTING THE INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL MODE When you push the ON OFF switch 4 you can choose the cruise control mode between the vehicle to vehicle distance control mode and the conventional fixed speed cruise control mode To choose the vehicle to vehicle distance control mode push the ON OFF switch quickly The CRUISE indicator light will appear in the vehicle information display Once a control mode is chosen and activates it cannot be changed to the other cruise control 5 20 Starting and driving mode To change the mode push the ON OFF switch once then turn on the system again Always confirm the setting in the vehicle informa tion display AWARNING In the conventional fixed speed cruise control mode a warning chime will not
258. evel Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defrost on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored See Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System earlier in this section 2 Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 105 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide 008 5 2 Three way catalyst 0 cece eee ee eens 5 2 On pavement and off road driving DICCAUUCNS srecan can paridat aae E RESE 5 3 Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS 5 3 Avoiding collision and rollover 005 5 6 Off road recovery checks aw ennenn ss sadnenns Gawas 5 6 Rapid air pressure lOSS 0 00 c eee e eee ees 5 6 Drinking alcohol drugs and driving 5 7 Driving safety precautions 00e eee eaee 5 7 ONON SWRC ccc ceeceuvadeceed ninanasa n a omen 5 9 INFINITI Intelligent Key System 5 10 Ignition switch POSINIONS lt 2 s6 cs sited wane eee meee cis 5 10 INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system 5 11 Before starting the engine 2 0005 5 11 Starting the engine lt n0 lt stanacseadeieuavavedeuwees 5 12 Driving the VeN
259. evice connected to the auxiliary input jacks located on the DVD player For more information see DVD auxiliary input jacks later in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 61 DVD gt Settings Display Mode Angle Mark 10Key Search Title Search Menu Some menus specific to each DVD will be shown For details see the instructions attached to the DVD Top Menu Each title menu in the disc will be shown For details see the instructions attached to the DVD Audio Some audio tracks specific to each DVD will be shown For details see the instructions attached to the DVD DVD gt Settings L_UP i A 0 A OL ae 10Key Search Titie Search Menu Skip DVD Language Maat LARERE HEESE 9 13 Subtitle Choose the preferred DVD subtitle language by touching the keyorthe gt key Display Mode Choose from the Full Wide Normal or Cinema mode by touching the keyorthe gt key Angle If the DVD contains different angles such as moving images the current image angle can be switched to another one 4 62 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Choose a different angle by touching the key or the key the angle will change if available Angle Mark When this item is turned on an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene can be seen from a dif
260. f While the main switch indicator is displayed the ICC system is opera tional Intelligent Cruise Control ICC system set switch indicator if so equipped This indicator is displayed while the vehicle speed is controlled by the Intelligent Cruise Con trol ICC system If the indicator blinks while the engine Is running it may indicate that the ICC system is not functioning properly Have the sys tem checked by an INFINITI dealer See Intelligent Cruise Control ICC system in the Starting and driving section for details Parking brake warning This warning illuminates when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven Low fuel warning This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it Is convenient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small re serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty Low windshield washer fluid warning This warning illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level Add windshield washer fluid as necessary See Window washer fluid in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual Instruments and controls 2 19 SECURITY SYSTEMS Your vehicle has two types of security systems Vehicle security system INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signal
261. f you wax the surface of the hood be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle A This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation If wax gets into the nozzle remove it with a needle or small pin 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself Rear window wiper blade Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win dow Push the wiper blade in and pivot until the blade becomes free Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm and snap into place Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by an INFINITI dealer Self adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self adjusting brakes The front and rear disc type brakes self adjust every time the brake pedal is applied AWARNING See an INFINITI dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators When a brake pad requires re placement a high pitched scraping or screech ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occa sional brake squeak squeal or other noise may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does
262. face temperature of the steering wheel is above 68 F 20 C when the switch is turned on the system will not heat the steering wheel This is not a malfunction Instruments and controls 2 31 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system on for most driv ing conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The pee indicator will come on Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system See Vehicle Dy namic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving section 2 32 Instruments and controls REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH if so equipped A WARNING The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly The rear sonar system is active when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the shift selector is in R Reverse When sensors detect obstacles within 5 9 ft 1 8 m of the rear bumper a beeping tone is emitted The rear sonar system can be disabled by push ing the OFF switc
263. ferent angle Touch the ON key to enable the angle mark the indicator light will illuminate 10Key Search Touch the 10Key Search key to open the num ber entry screen Input the number you want to search for and touch the OK key The specified Title Chapter or Group Track will be played Title Search The scene with the specified title will be dis played the number of times the key or the key is touched Menu Skip DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the Menu Skip key is turned on Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on DVD Language Touch the DVD Language key to open the num ber entry screen Input the number correspond ing to the preferred language and touch the OK key The DVD top menu language will be changed to the one specified DRC DRC Dynamic Range Compression allows you to tune the dynamic range of the sound recorded in the Dolby Digital format Touch the key or the key to tune the DRC DVD auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are located on the front of the DVD player which is located inside the cen ter console NTSC and PAL compatible devices such as video games camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica tion purposes Yellow v
264. fications transpor tation and registration are the responsibil ity of the user INFINITI is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION A LTI0085 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN PLATE The vehicle identification number VIN plate is attached as shown This number is the identifica tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number The vehicle identification number is located as shown Technical and consumer information 9 9 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown 9 10 Technical and consumer information F M V S S C M V S S CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel is affixed as shown This label contains valu able vehicle information such as Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR month and year of manufacture Vehicle Identification Number VIN etc Review it carefully EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is at tached to the underside of the hood as shown INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label The label is located as shown AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION Use the following steps to mount the front l
265. filter When re placing use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor rect oil and filter quality and or viscosity is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited war ranty Technical and consumer information 9 5 Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes repeated short distance driving at cold out side temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your INFINITI vehicle must be charged with the refriger ant HFC 134a R 134a and the oil NISSAN A C system oil DH PS or the exact equiva lents 9 6 Techn
266. formation 8 00 seee Information gt Command List Navigation Commands CO Fuel Economy B Traffic Info B Navigation Commands r g Phone Commands Phone Commands Tire Pressure Where am I Audio Commands Trip Computer pi GPS Satellite Info B O coe amp Push the TALK swilch to start voice recognition amp Push the TALK swilch to start voice recognition Audio Commands l Information Commands Only manual controls such as the touch screen 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument 5 Highlight a category using the INFINITI con can navigate the command list menu panel troller and press the ENTER button The As an alternative to the voice command Help 2 Highlight the Others key using the INFINITI eee Heh OF Areal ey ACG ie you may access the command list using the fol controller and press the ENTER button lowing steps a ay a 6 If necessary scroll the screen using the sai er mugung nt the voce Recognition xey Using INFINITI controller to view the entre list the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button 7 Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen NOTE You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say Help 4 Highlight the Command List key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 95 Alternate Command Mode command list Navigation Command 4 96 Monitor cli
267. from the pedal Automatic transmission P Park position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in the P Park position without applying any brakes Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera tion If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur ther than normal the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop see an INFINITI dealer immediately Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied Parking brake Check the parking brake opera tion regularly The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied If the parking brake needs adjustment see an INFINITI dealer Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters seatback recliner etc to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks hold securely in all latched positions Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely Check the belt web bing for cuts fraying wear or damage Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer ing system such as excessive freeplay hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and ch
268. g Maximum Tonaue Load 900 lb 890 lb 890 lb 9 408 kg 404 kg 404 kg Maximum Gross Combined 15 100 Ib 15 100 Ib 15 100 lb Weight Rating 6 849 kg 6 849 kg 6 849 kg 1 The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity 2 Use of a weight distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5 000 Ibs Technical and consumer information 9 19 TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package The trailer tow package in cludes a receiver type frame mounted hitch This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed Genuine INFINITI ball mounts and hitch balls are available from your INFINITI dealer If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver type frame mounted hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer A genuine INFINITI trailer hitch is available from your INFINITI dealer Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds
269. g the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface If this occurs maintain control of the vehicle by follow ing the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the con ditions of the vehicle road and traffic 1 Remain calm and do not overreact 2 Do not apply the brakes 3 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 4 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 5 If there is nothing in the way steer the ve hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced Do not attempt to drive the ve hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced 6 When it is safe to do so gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface When all tires are on the road surface steer the vehicle to stay in the ap propriate driving lane lf you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle road or traffic conditions gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under inflated tires Rapid air pressure loss can affect t
270. gate open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual A CAUTION If the power lift gate does not stay open or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at any time while a continuous warning Power lift gate release chime sounds do not operate the lift f the lift gate cannot be opened with the door gate There may be a pressure loss in lock switch or keyfob due to a discharged battery one or both of the lift gate gas stays follow these steps Have the lift gate inspected by an INFINITI dealer 1 Remove the cover on the inside of the lift gate LPD0236 Power lift gate release Do not activate the power lift gate if one or both of the lift gate gas stays are 2 Move the lever up to open the lift gate removed Damage to the lift gate or power lift gate mechanisms may occur 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments GLASS HATCH To open press the button up on the smaller outside handle to release the glass hatch then pull up on the glass hatch To close lower and push the glass hatch down securely NOTE The lift gate must be unlocked in order to open the glass hatch AWARNING Do not drive with the glass hatch open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Exhaust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual FUEL FILLER DOOR r 2
271. gine coolant temperature If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving pull off the road in a safe area stop the engine and allow it to cool If the light remains on after checking the oil and coolant stop the en gine immediately and call an INFINITI dealer or other authorized repair shop This light is not designed to indicate a low oil or low coolant level Check the oil level with the dipstick and check the coolant level on the reservoir See Engine oil and Checking engine coolant level in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual Also see If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately Such damage is not cov ered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos sible If the engine is overheated con tinued operation of the vehicle may se riously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate ac tion required AND 4WD warning light PA model The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni tion switch is placed in the ON position It turns off soon after the engine is started If the engine or
272. h When the system is disabled the indicator light on the switch will illuminate The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position See Rear sonar system in the Starting and driving section FRONT SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH If so equipped AWARNING The front sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper driving The front sonar system is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift selector Is in a forward gear position When sensors detect obstacles within 3 ft 1 0 m of the front bumper a beeping tone is emitted The front sonar system can be disabled by push ing the OFF switch When the system is disabled the indicator light on the switch will illuminate Push the switch again to enable the system The indicator light will go off TOW MODE SWITCH The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is turned on See Front sonar system in the Starting and driving section Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer load or light trailer light load will not cause any damage How ever fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission engine driving characteristics may feel unusual Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode The indicator light on the tow mode switch illumi nates
273. h the holes in the seat Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction The stalk with the adjustment notches 1 must be installed in the hole with the lock button Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position 1 10 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front seat Active Head Restraints The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear end collision The movement of the head restraint helps support the occu pant s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear end collisions After the collision the head restraints return to their original position Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described in this section ADJUSTABLE HEADREST if so equipped AWARNING The adjustable headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against in jury in certain rear end collisions Adjust the headrests properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anyth
274. he LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely discharged Un locking the steering wheel is impossible even if the Intelligent Key is inserted into the ignition Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 cylinder Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys contact an INFINITI dealer A CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the Intelligent Key Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intelligent Key e Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C 3 8 Pre driving checks and adjustments Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen INFINIT
275. he P Park tion and place the ignition switch in the continuously position OFF position When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately asics Carry the Intelligent Key with you le knob turned to LOCK 3 seconds and all the doors unlock D i a VSS ene Nene The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle Carry the Intelligent Key with you When pushing the door handle request The outside chime sounds for approximately A door is not closed securely Close the door securely switch to lock the door 2 seconds The door handle request switch is pushed Push the door handle request switch after before the door is closed the door is closed Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 17 HOOD CQ Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel The hood will spring up slightly 2 Lift up the lever at the front of the hood as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood When closing the hood lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustments AWARNING e Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving Fail ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment to avoid injury do not open the hood LIFT GATE AWARNING Always be sure the lift gate has been closed securely to prevent it from ope
276. he desired drive mode according to the driving conditions 2WD or 4WD shift procedure 5 42 Starting and driving AWD Shift Wheels Indicator Light AWD shit Transfer 4LO position alte ane EN Peo Move the 4WD switch HS sft Rear wheels a 2WD lt gt AUTO lt gt 4H Vast f l AWD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position engaged IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFT ree Fa For driving on dry paved roads Economy SELECTOR TO THE N POSITION IN THIS OP DRIVING STRAIGHT sis se 3 or 4 wheels For driving on paved or slippery roads pee na teh ATE 4 wheels m y yee TH T covered roads Neutral Neutral disengages the automatic transmis 1 Stop the vehicle sion mechanical parking lock which will 2 Move the shift selector to the N position 1 allow the vehicle to roll Do not leave the 3 Push the 4WD shift switch and move it to May blink transfer shift position in Neutral 2 4LO or 4H with the brake pedal depressed YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WD SHIFT SWITCH BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO OR 4 wheels For use when maximum power and traction 4LO TO 4H UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST iien is required for example on steep grades STOPPED THE VEHICLE DEPRESSED THE or rocky sandy muddy roads BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVE THE SHIFT SELEC TOR TO NEUTRAL 3 The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink Stop the vehicle Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the shift selector has been shifted
277. he handling and stability of the vehicle especially at highway speeds Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage See Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows out while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the ve hicle road and traffic AWARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire e Do not rapidly apply the brakes Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal e Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel 1 Remain calm and do not over react 2 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 3 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 4 Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible 5 Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle 6 Turn on the hazard warning flashers
278. he moonroof will immediately open backward When tilting down If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down the moonroof will im mediately tilt up If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re peats opening or tilting up the moonroof keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens the moonroof will fully close gradually Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof AWARNING In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints e Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing A CAUTION Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening e Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area Instruments and controls 2 51 Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for ward or backward If the moonroof does not close Have your INFINITI dealer check and repair the moonroof 2 52 Instruments and controls INTERIOR LIGHT The interior light has a three position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position When the switch is in the ON position 4 the interior lights illuminate regardless of door posi tion The lights will go off after about 30 minutes unless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON pos
279. he pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re quired while driving Self test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydraulic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the computer senses a malfunc tion it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve hicle motion Under certain driving situations the system will control braking and engine output to help keep the vehicle on its steered path When the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system is operating the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks lf the slip indicator blinks the road condi tions may be slippery Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions See Slip indicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off in
280. he road and away from traffic 2 Turn on the hazard warning flashers 3 Park ona level surface and apply the parking brake Shift the transmission into P Park 4 Turn off the engine 5 Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance 6 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from traffic and clear of the vehicle AWARNING Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the automatic transmission is shifted into P Park Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery areas This is hazardous Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Wait for profes sional road assistance When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated and the low tire pressure warning system will not function Con tact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks 1 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire 2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up AWARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury oeoo e Getting the spare tire and tools T Lift the luggage board in the cargo area and remove the jack tool kit from the storage area See Cargo area storage
281. he system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the compact disc DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play EE SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons When the SEEK CAT button is pressed while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press several Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 37 times to skip back through tracks The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed When the TRACK gt button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played The INFINITI controller can also be used to select tracks when a CD is being played lt SEEK CAT and TRACK Rewind Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT rewind button or the TRACK fast forward button while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will p
282. hed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch After the indicator light goes off the se lected positions are stored in the selected memory 1 or 2 If a new memory is stored in the same memory switch the previous memory will be deleted Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory position memory switch 1 or 2 with the follow ing procedure 1 Follow the steps for storing a memory posi tion Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 29 2 While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec onds press the 1 button on the keyfob The indicator light will blink After the indica tor light goes off the keyfob is linked to that memory setting When the ignition switch is moved back to the OFF position press the 1 button on the key fob The driver s seat steering wheel accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position NOTE If a new memory position is saved to the memory switch the keyfob automatically re links Confirming memory storage Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the SET switch If the main memory has not been stored the indicator light will come on for approximately 0 5 seconds When the memory has stored the position the indicator light will stay on for approxi mately 5 seconds 3 30 Pre driving checks and
283. her or when restarting depress the accelerator pedal a little ap proximately 1 3 to the floor and hold it and then crank the engine Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds After cranking the engine release the accel 5 12 Starting and driving erator pedal Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turn ing the ignition key to START Release the key when the engine starts If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure A CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again otherwise the starter could be damaged 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec onds after starting Do not race the engine while warming it up Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first especially in cold weather In cold weather keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start DRIVING THE VEHICLE ENGINE PROTECTION MODE The engine has an engine protection mode to reduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem perature becomes too high for example when
284. hold them in your lap or arms Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations AWARNING Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags side air bags or curtain and rollover air bags inflate if they are not properly re strained Pre teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat if possible Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 55 WRS0431 Do not lean against doors or windows A WARNING Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air WARNING Bag System never install a rear facing Front seat mounted side impact supple child restraint in the front seat An in mental air bags and roof mounted curtain flating front air bag could seriously in side impact and rollover supplemental air jure or kill your child See Child re bags mamie D Cat neg ny this econ enol The side air bags and curtain and roll detalls over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact rear im pact or lower severity side collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents 1 56 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0365 Do not lean against doors or windows SSS0162 Do not lean against doors or windows A WARNING The seat belts the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are most effective when you are sitt
285. hould be properly re reduce the effectiveness of the entire strained in the rear seat and if appro restraint system and increase the priate in a child restraint chance or severity of injury in an acci dent Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 21 AWARNING e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never put the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS NOT THE WAIST A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted Doing so may reduce its effectiveness Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts If the seat belt warning light glows con tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened it may indicate a mal function in the system Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer No changes should be made to the seat belt system For example do not modify the seat belt add material or install devices that may change the seat belt r
286. ht the Speaker Adaptation key and then press the ENTER button G5 Settings gt Speaker Adaptation ye oun i E Pow i E Learning results can be stored deleted edited 4 Select the user whose voice is to be memo rized by the system and press the ENTER button Settings gt Speaker Adaptation eS El sme Ga TS E sein Pe Si Ef mom o EI Vehicle O O 7 5 Select a category to be learned by the sys tem from the following list and then press the ENTER button Navigation Audio Phone Vehicle Info Others The voice commands in the category are displayed 6 Select a voice command to train and then press the ENTER button The Voice Recognition system starts Settings gt Speaker Adaptation Sw Music Box Changes the source of the audio system to the Music Box amp To end tutorial push the TALK switch for 2 seconds 7 The system requests that you repeat a com mand after a tone This command is also displayed on the screen 8 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to B speak the command that the system requested 9 When the system has recognized the voice command the voice of the user is learned Press the f switch or the BACK button to return to the previous screen If the system has learned the command correctly the voice command indicator on the screen turns on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition syste
287. i raean ecce vie aded cdulwaeeeee couedenne 0 4 Passenger compartment 00 cee eee ees 0 5 INSUUMCNE DANClersc4ucenaeveeee ced eeeeceetseaee ede 0 6 Engine compartment check locations 0 8 Warning indicator lights lt c 0s2 ssiaeeeniaee sede ew es 0 9 AIR BAGS SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS 0 2 Illustrated table of contents 3rd row bench seat belts P 1 20 2nd row seat belts P 1 20 Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag P 1 52 Front seat belts P 1 20 Head Restraints P 1 7 Supplemental front impact air bags P 1 52 Seats P 1 2 Occupant classification sensor pressure sensor P 1 59 Seat belt with pretensioner P 1 65 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag P 1 52 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system P 1 33 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor P 1 47 3rd row seat top tether strap anchor P 1 48 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details EXTERIOR FRONT 13 Engine hood P 3 18 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 22 Windshield P 8 19 Power windows P 2 47 Door locks INFINITI Intelligent Key keys P 3 4 3 7 3 2 Mirrors P 3 27 Tire pressure P 9 11 Flat tire P 6 2 Tire chains P 8 39 Replacing bulbs P 8 29 Headlight switch P 2 24 Fog light switch and turn signal switch P 2 29 P 2 24 Tow ho
288. ical and consumer information A CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condition ing system and will require the replace ment of all air conditioner system components The refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a in your INFINITI vehicle does not harm the earth s ozone layer Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth s atmosphere certain government regula tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys tem service An INFINITI dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger ant Contact an INFINITI dealer when servicing your air conditioner system SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE VK56DE Type Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC Cylinder arrangement 8 cylinder V block Slanted at 90 Bore x Stroke in mm 3 858 x 3 622 98 x 92 Displacement cu in cm 338 78 5 552 Firing order 1 8 7 3 6 5 4 2 Idle speed A T in N position Ignition timing degree B T D C at idle No adjustment is necessary speed CO at idle Spark plug DILFR5A 11 Spark plug gap Nominal in mm 0 043 1 1 Camshaft operation Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES 002 Technical and consumer information 9 7 WHEELS AND TIRES Wheels 20 x 8 0JJ Tires P275 60R20 Spare tire Full size 9 8 Technical and consumer information DIMENSIONS
289. icense LABEL plate The air conditioner specification label is affixed to 1 Make holes on the plastic finisher at the the underside of the hood as shown location mark small dimple using a 0 20 in 5 mm drill Apply light pressure to the drill Install the license plate holder using the two screws provided with the holder 2 Mount the license plate using two M6 14mm bolts License plate bolt tightening torque 3 8 4 7 ft lb 5 10 6 37 N m Technical and consumer information 9 11 VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION AWARNING it is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle Curb Weight actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment flu ids emergency tools and spare tire assembly This weight does not in clude passengers and cargo 9 12 Technical and consumer information GVW Gross Vehicle Weight curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle pa
290. icle ahead the ICC will adjust the speed to maintain the dis tance selected by the driver from the vehicle ahead If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain con trol of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads If this happens drive with out the ICC system Starting and driving 5 25 ACCEL RES CANCEL 1 ON OFF ehant Intelligent cruise control switch The system is operated by a master ON OFF switch and four control switches all mounted on the steering wheel 1 2 ON OFF switch Master switch to activate the system ACCELERATE RESUME switch Resumes set speed or increases speed in crementally CANCEL switch Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed 5 26 Starting and driving COAST SET switch Sets desired cruise speed reduces speed incrementally DISTANCE switch Changes the following distance to long medium short CRUISE Intelligent cruise control system display The display is located within the vehicle informa tion display 1 2 Intelligent Cruise Control system warning light Orange The light comes on in the instrument panel if there is a malfunction in the ICC system Vehicle ahead detection indicator Indicates wheth
291. icle will maintain the set speed The CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display remains on The Intelligent Cruise Control system cannot be set under the following conditions even if the COAST SET switch is pushed When traveling outside the 25 to 89 MPH 40 to 144 km h speed range 5 28 Starting and driving When the selector lever is not in the D Drive 4 3 2 or 1 position While the vehicle is being braked by the driver When pressing the ACCEL RES switch without there being a set speed in memory When the windshield wipers are operating When the parking brake is applied When the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system is switched off CRUISE 7 n MPH Barrie WSD0217 System set display with vehicle ahead CRUISE T n MPH WSD0218 System set display without vehicle ahead System operation A WARNING Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead Depress the accelerator to prop erly accelerate your vehicle when accel eration is required for a lane change De press the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden brak ing or if a vehicle cuts in Always stay alert when using the ICC system The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions The ICC system main
292. ideo input White left channel audio input Red right channel audio input Before connecting a device to a jack power off the portable device and turn off the DVD player R DVD AUX To view something connected to the auxiliary input jacks press the DISC AUX button until the DVD mode appears then touch the Settings key Then touch the Switch to DVD AUX key The screen will change to the DVD AUX mode WIDE DVD AUX settings Touch the Settings key to adjust the following settings Switch to DVD Touch this key to switch back to the DVD mode Video Format If the auxiliary source is in a different video format touch the keyorthe gt key and the video format will change Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 63 gt DVD AUX Switch to DVD NTSC Video Format Display Mode Display Mode Choose from the Full Wide Normal or Cin ema mode by touching the key or the P key When all the changes have been made press the BACK button to save all the settings REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION For all operation precautions see Before oper ating the DVD Mobile Entertainment System earlier in this section The DVD system can also be controlled by using the remote controller in the rear seats See the following items PWR on off button With the ignition switch placed in the A
293. ient temperatures and the transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink even when the 4WD shift switch is shifted After driving for a while you can change the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4LO When driving on rough roads Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO 4H or 4LO Drive carefully according to the road surface conditions When the vehicle is stuck Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO e f it is difficult to free the vehicle repeat forward and backward movement to in crease the movement If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud place stones or wooden blocks under the tires Then try the recovery procedures above Tire If the 4WD shift switch is operated while making a turn accelerating or decelerating or if the ignition switch is turned off while in the AUTO 4H or 4LO you may feel a jolt This is not abnormal When the vehicle is stopped after mak ing a turn you may feel a slight jolt after the shift selector is shifted to N or chains may be effective P This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a CAUTION malfunction e Do not spin the tires excessively Tires will sink deep into the mud making it fcu ee ne ee e Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the Avoid shifting gears with the engine 2WD AUTO 4H or 4LO position depend running at high speeds as this may ing on driving conditions cause malfunction A CAUTION When driving straight shif
294. ies are required If the vehi cle s battery is discharged or is discon nected HomeLink will retain all program ming Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed retain the original trans mitter for future programming procedures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information refer to Program ming HomeLink later in this section AWARNING e Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re verse features as required by federal safety standards These standards be came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1 1982 A ga rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases the risk of serious injury or death During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close if the transmitter is within range Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door gate etc that you are programming Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver PROGRAMMING HOMELINK 1 To begin press and hold the two outer HomeLink but
295. ights 2 2 0 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another COUNTY enero tens eetentes ence EEEE EAER 9 9 Vehicle identification 0 00 cece eee ee ees 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle identification number chassis number ci ccabedn ewe gssaueeweieronaed 9 9 Engine serial number cces lt sddueeutenseaven he 9 10 F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 10 Emission control information label 9 10 Tire and loading information label 9 11 Air conditioner specification label 9 11 Installing front license plate 5 9 11 Vehicle loading information 02 00 9 12 TOWNS TEE Gan eee eds vec neewenreeeeaeeeees 9 12 Vehicle load capacity tceceeskveeeneeedheeape ws 9 12 Securing the load nnus nunana naaran 9 14 Logding MDS lt c2ccccesedeee2 eee oeecueese cedeses 9 15 Measurement of weights 2 00 00ee 9 15 TOWING a tallel os ecco cette eetore states ee sae 9 16 Maximum lOaGNIMUS 25 i24 sex ncdsdetagean ee eee 9 16 Towing load specification 02 00 9 19 Towing Solely cin ctaweveectads etteuuecee es soe 9 20 Pldl OWING s accesy eniin eonna a4 eee Ranieemate ies 9 28 SNOW PIOW scone sends esc r ERARE EEEE E RER 9 28 Uniform tire quality grading 00 000e 9 29 Emission control system warranty 9 30 Reporting safety
296. ill flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS e Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re paired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail with out warning e The use of retread tires is not recommended For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet esey Four wheel drive models A CAUTION Always use tires of the same type size brand construction bias bias belted or radial and tread pattern on all four wheels Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may dam age the transmission transfer case and differential gears Maintenance and do it yourself 8 41 If excessive tire wear is found it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size brand construction and tread pattern The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary Contact an INFINITI dealer Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and
297. imes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery Check the fluid level in each cell It should be between the MAX and MIN lines Ve hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level Brake fluid level Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself Engine drive belts Make sure the drive belts are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports cracks or holes If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes immediately have the exhaust system inspected by an INFINITI dealer See the carbon monoxide warning in the Starting an
298. in snow ice etc In very windy areas Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident 3 4 ACCEL RES COAST SET 7 CANCEL N 8 ley Conventional fixed speed cruise control mode display and switch The display is located within the vehicle informa tion display 1 Intelligent Cruise Control system display 2 ICC system warning light Orange The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the ICC system and is illuminated in the instrument panel 3 CRUISE indicator light Indicates that the ON OFF switch is ON and appears in the vehicle information display Starting and driving 5 35 4 Cruise set switch indicator light The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the conventional fixed speed cruise control mode of the ICC sys tem and is in the vehicle information display 5 ACCELERATE RESUME switch Resumes set speed or increases speed in crementally 6 COAST SET switch Sets the desired cruise speed reduces speed incrementally 7 CANCEL switch Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed 8 ON OFF switch Master switch to activate the system 5 36 Starting and driving CRUISE COAST SET CH wF Operating conventional fixed speed cruise control mode To turn on the conventional fixed speed cruise control mode push and hold the ON OFF switch Q for longer than about 1 5 seconds When pushing the ON OFF s
299. in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with 9 32 Technical and consumer information the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equip ment Is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manu facturer and INFINITI dealer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have ac cess to the vehicle or the EDR EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per mitted by law OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle Filled with wiring diagrams illustrations and step by step diagnostic and adjustment pro cedures this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at INFINITI dealerships Also available are genuine INFINITI Owner s Manuals and genuine INFINITI Service and Owner s Manuals for older INFINITI models For USA For current pricing and avail
300. ing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Installing top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seat ing positions that do not have a top tether anchor WRS0697 Forward facing step 6 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child re straints fit in all types of vehicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 43 7 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 3 through 6 FO
301. ing rigid mounted step 2 LRS0673 Rear facing step 3 3 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments 1 38 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0674 Rear facing step 4 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt if applicable Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve hicles 5 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 2 through 4 REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS AWARNING The three point seat belt with Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR must be used wh
302. ing suspension cycle the igni tion switch ON OFF one time In case of emergency 6 5 2 Place the jack directly under the jack up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point The jack up points are indicated by stamped ar rows on the side of the frame In case of emergency The jack should be used on firm and level ground Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown To lift the vehicle securely hold the jack lever and rod Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual 1 Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be tween the wheel and hub 2 Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight 3 With the wheel nut wrench tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight 4 Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Then with the wheel nut wrench tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated Lower the ve hicle completely AWARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could cause an accident Do not use
303. ing system refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a 6 Air conditioning system oil NISSAN A C System Oil Type S or equivalent 6 Transfer fluid 3 1 8 qt 2 5 8 at 3 0 Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF Continental U S and Alaska or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent if available Front differential gear oil 3 3 8 pt 2 7 8 pt 1 6 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL 5 80W 90 OR API GL 5 Viscosity SAE 80W 90 8 Rear differential gear oil 3 3 4 pt 3 1 8 pt 1 75 API GL 5 Synthetic 75W 90 gear oil or equivalent 9 Windshield washer fluid shared between 1 1 4 gal 1 gal 4 5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Antifreeze or front and rear wipers equivalent 1 For further details see Fuel recommendation 2 For further details see Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 3 If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the INFINITI new ve hicle limited parny 4 DEXRON VI type ATF or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid may also be used 5 Available in mainland USA through your INFINITI dealer 6 For further details see Air conditioner specification label 7 For further details see
304. ing the keypad displayed on the screen For infor mation on how to use the touch screen see How to use the touch screen earlier in this section Phone fa 8 00 k gt 0 03 Cali in Progress XXXXXXX XXXAKKXXXX RECEIVING A CALL When you hear a phone ring the display will change to phone mode To receive a call follow one of the procedures listed below a Touch the Answer key on the display b Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel c Press the phone 4 button on the steering wheel switches There are some options available when receiving a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen Answer Accept an incoming call to talk On Hold Put an incoming call on hold Reject Call Reject an incoming call To finish the call follow one of the procedures listed below a Touch the Reject Call key on the display b Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel c Press and hold the phone a steering wheel switches button on the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 77 Phone fa 8 00 E Hang up e pH Use Handset l k gt 0 03 Call in Progress XXXXXXX XXXXKXXXXX z pm a a Push ENTER to PHONE switch to hang up DURING A CALL There are some options available during a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen If necessary Hang up Finish the call Use Han
305. ing the tab and lifting the cover up 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself WDI0452 Type A 5 If the fuse is open A replace it with a new fuse 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by an INFINITI dealer Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace with only genuine NISSAN parts Type B LDIO0456 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the glove box to access the fuse box cover 4 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller BATTERY REPLACEMENT 3 Pull the fuse box cover to remove CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow 5 Ifthe fuse is open replace it with an equiva the battery or removed parts lent good fuse Push the fuse box cover to install 7 lf a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by an INFINITI dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 8 26 Ma
306. ing to the adjustable headrest stalks or remove the adjustable headrests Do not use the seat if the adjustable head rests have been removed Failure to fol low these instructions can reduce the ef fectiveness of the adjustable headrests This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with adjustable headrests All of the headrests are adjustable E Indicates the seating position is equipped with an adjustable headrest Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or adjustable headrest Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 11 TR LRS0888 Components Adjustment To raise the headrest pull it up 1 Adjustable headrest Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the 2 Adjustment notches center of the seat occupant s ears 3 Lock knob 4 Stalks 1 12 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0889 To lower push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down d Cd LRS0890 Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable headrests A WO N Pull the headrest up to the highest position Push and hold the lock knob Remove the headrest from the seat Store the headrest properly so it is not loose in the vehicle Install and properly adjust the headrest be fore an occupant uses the seating position
307. ing well back and upright in the seat The side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflate with great force Do not allow anyone to place their hand leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 57 AWARNING When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat If the side air bag inflates you may be seriously injured Be especially care ful with children who should always be properly restrained Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations e Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks They may interfere with side air bag inflation 1 58 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system ol 1 Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators 2 Roof mounted curtain side impact and rollover supplemental air bags 3 Airbag Control Unit ACU 4 Supplemental front impact air bag mod ules 5 Crash zone sensor 6 Occupant classification system control unit 7 Occupant classification sensor pres sure sensor 8 Seat belt buckle switches 9 Seat b
308. intenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day op eration They are essential for proper vehicle op eration It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed 8 2 Maintenance and do it yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools These checks or inspections can be done by you a qualified technician or if you prefer an INFINITI dealer Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and corrected by an INFINITI dealer INFINITI technicians are well trained specialists who are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins service tips and in dealership training programs They are completely qualified to work on INFINITI ve hicles before they work on your vehicle rather than after they have worked on it You can be confident that an INFINITI dealer s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be per formed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smells be sure to check for the cause or have an INFINIT
309. intenance and do it yourself INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol lows 1 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 2 Insert a small screwdriver A into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part Use a cloth to protect the casing 3 Replace the battery with a new one Recommended battery CR2025 or equiva lent Do not touch the internal circuit and elec tric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction Hold the battery by the edges Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity Make sure that the side faces the bot tom of the case 4 Close the lid securely as illustrated 5 Operate the buttons to check the operation See an INFINITI dealer if you need assistance for replacement FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation of the device LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb Low beam If rep
310. ion see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual Tow mode Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load Press the TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi nates when tow mode is selected Press the TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off Tow mode is automatically cancelled when the ignition switch is turned OFF Technical and consumer information 9 27 Tow mode includes the following features Grade logic Adjusts transmission shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a grade Downhill Speed Control DSC automati cally downshifts when driving down a grade with a trailer or heavy load to help control vehicle speed Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer load or light trailer light load will not cause any damage However fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission engine driving characteristics may feel unusual When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quently For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle such as a motor home 9 28 Technical and
311. ion allows hands free operation of the systems equipped on this ve hicle such as phone and vehicle information There are two voice recognition modes of opera tion available They are Standard Mode e Alternate Command Mode In Standard Mode the factory default setting commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system You can complete your desired operation by simply following the prompts given by the system In this mode hands free operation of Audio Climate Control and Display is not available through INFINITI Voice Recognition For advanced operation you can change to an Alternate Command Mode that enables the op eration of the display audio and climate control through INFINITI Voice Recognition When this mode is active an expanded list of commands can be spoken after pushing the TALK 4 switch on the steering wheel and the voice com mand menu prompts are turned off In Alternate Command Mode the recognition success rate may be affected because the num ber of available commands and the ways of speaking each command are increased See INFINITI Voice Recognition Alternate Command Mode later in this section To improve the recognition success rate when Alternate Command Mode is active try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode See Speaker Adaptation Function later in this section Otherwise it is recommended that Alternate Command Mode be
312. ir bag status light is not illuminated reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat If the passenger air bag status light will not illu minate even though you believe that the child restraint the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat in which case the air bag is OFF Your INFINITI dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool However until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status For example if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system the supplemental air bag warning light AF located in the meter and gauges area on the driver s side of the instrument panel will blink Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer Other supplemental front impact air bag precautions AWARNING e Do not place any objects on the steer ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel Also do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel Such
313. ir bag horn P 1 52 P 2 30 Meters gauges and warning indicator lights P 2 3 2 8 Instrument brightness control P 2 28 Cruise control main set switches if so equipped and Intelligent cruise control main set switches if so equipped P 5 17 P 5 19 Windshield wiper washer switch and rear window wiper washer switch P 2 22 P 2 23 Ignition switch P 5 9 Navigation system P 4 2 Navigation system controls P 4 2 Audio system controls P 4 26 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 52 Glove box P 2 37 Hazard lights P 2 29 Climate controls P 4 22 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 29 26 27 28 29 30 ai 32 33 Power outlet P 2 34 Heated seat switch P 2 30 Tow mode switch P 2 33 Vehicle dynamic control VDC OFF switch P 2 32 Shift selector P 5 12 Heated steering wheel switch P 2 31 Clock P 2 34 Power outlet P 2 34 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 61 Auxiliary jack P 4 39 4WD shift switch if so equipped P 5 41 Tilt steering wheel control P 3 24 Rear or front and rear sonar system off switch P 5 52 Pedal position adjustment switch P 3 25 Headlight aiming control P 2 27 Power vent windows switch P 2 50 Lift gate open close switch P 3 18 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrate
314. is lifted A chime will sound to announce the reversal Auto Reverse If an obstacle is detected during power open or power close a warning chime will sound and the lift gate will reverse direction and return to the full open or full close position If a second obstacle is detected the lift gate motion will stop and the drive motor will disengage The lift gate will enter manual mode A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the lift gate If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip during power close the lift gate will reverse di rection and return to the full open position 3 20 Pre driving checks and adjustments NOTE If the pinch strip is damaged or removed the power close function will not operate AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the lift gate Manual Mode If power operation is not available the lift gate may be operated manually Power operation may not be available if the cancel switch is in the on position if multiple obstacles have been de tected in a single power cycle or if battery volt age Is low To open the lift gate manually press up on the outside handle To close lower and push the lift gate down se curely Safe Mode If the lift gate gas stays 1 lose pressure the power lift gate safe mode is activated When the s
315. is operational AWARNING Do not place any objects near the seat back of the front seats Also do not place any objects an umbrella bag etc between the front door finisher and the front seat Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates Right after inflation several side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems This is to prevent dam age to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or side panel This could affect proper operation of the curtain and rollover air bag systems Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing material near the seat backs or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers around the side air bag Work around and on the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems should be done by an INFINITI dealer Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an INFINITI dealer The SRS wiring harnesses should not be modified or discon nected Unauthorized electrical test equipment and pro
316. ition When the switch is in the DOOR position the interior lights and puddle lights will stay on for about 30 seconds when The doors are unlocked by the keyfob a key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position The driver s door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is activated when The driver s door is locked by the keyfob a key or the power door lock switch The ignition switch is turned ON When the switch is in the OFF position 8 the interior lights do not illuminate regardless of door position The puddle lights come on when any front or rear passenger door is opened The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min utes while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged NOTE The footwell and door step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are open regardless of the interior light switch position These lights will turn off auto matically after about 30 minutes while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery CONSOLE LIGHT The console light will turn on whenever the parking light
317. itor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 9 Resetting the maintenance interval To reset the reminder schedule distance to O mi km select the Reset Distance key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button LHA0839 Displaying the maintenance notice re minder Select the Interval Reminder ON key and press the ENTER button to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically at the set mainte nance interval The indicator light will illuminate when it is ON The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au tomatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position 4 10 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The ignition switch is placed in the ON po sition the next time the vehicle will be driven To return to the previous display after the MAIN TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed press the BACK button The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met The Reset key is selected The Interval Reminder ON key is set to OFF indicator light not illuminated The maintenance interval is set again Information gt Others 8 00 Sack i Voice Recognition i Navigation Version Show voice recognition settings Other items Press the INFO butto
318. iving safety precautions in the Start ing and driving section of this manual ON PAVEMENT AND OFF ROAD DRIVING This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off road use As with other vehicles with features of this type fail ure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read On pavement and off road driving precautions and Avoid ing collision and rollover and Driving safety precautions in the Starting and driving section of this manual MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or per formance problems resulting from modi fications may not be covered under INFINITI warranties WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing INFINITI reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with out obligation IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual They are used in the following ways AWA
319. ject approaching the tone will sound again The FSS automatically turns on when the shift selector is placed in a forward gear and the ignition switch is ON The front and rear sonar system off switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the FSS on and off To turn the FSS off the ignition switch must be ON and the shift selector in D Drive An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off If the indicator light illuminates when the FSS is not turned off it may indicate a malfunction in the FSS Keep the FSS sensors located on the front bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the FSS COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing apply de icer through the key hole If the lock becomes frozen heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob ANTI FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem perature will drop below 32 F 0 C check the anti freeze to assure proper winter protection For details see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery To maintain maxi
320. l and consumer information 9 25 Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic Steering stability and braking perfor mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert ently becoming unlatched Avoid abrupt starts acceleration or stops Avoid sharp turns or lane changes Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed When backing up hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go Make small corrections and back up slowly If possible have someone guide you when you are backing up 9 26 Technical and consumer information Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking Parking on a slope is not recommended however if you must do so A CAUTION If you move the shift selector to the P Park position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake transmission damage could occur 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal 2 Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer whe
321. l be placed on hold automatically after several rings Use Vehicle Ringtone If this item is turned on a specific ringtone that is different from the cellular phone s will sound when receiving a call Delete Call Logs Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs from the list Bluetooth Setup See the following information for each item n Biuetooth Pair Phone x Priority Change Remove Paired Phone i Use handsfree mode for paired phones gt Settings gt Bluetooth Setup 8 es Biuetooth Info SK bey ETE TE ust i Bluetooth If this item is turned off the connection be tween the cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module will be canceled Bluetooth Info Check information about the device name vehicle name device address device PIN and connection status Pair Phone See Pairing Procedure in this section 4 80 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems a Pair Phone zi Remove Paired Phone zi Paired Phone List Edit Phone Name i Add a new Bluetooth phone max 5 gt Settings gt Bluetooth Setup 8 eT Priority Change X nmn TE T Y MT Priority Change If multiple phones are registered to the sys tem you can change the priority of the phones on the shown list The system shows the priority level of each phone Select phone to change priority Then select an other phone to swap priority levels Remove Paired Phone Delete
322. lacement is required see an INFINITI dealer AWARNING Z HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on they pro duce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disas semble Always have your xenon head lights replaced at an INFINITI dealer For additional information see Headlight and turn signal switch in the lInstru ments and controls section Replacing the halogen headlight bulb High beam The headlight is a semi sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight halogen bulb Be cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement see your INFINITI dealer A CAUTION High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped When handling the bulb do not touch the glass envelope e DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE HANDS Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart Do not leave the bulb out of the head light reflector for a long period of time as dust moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the per formance of the headlight Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb When aiming adjustment is necessary contact an INFINITI dealer Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes
323. lay while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed TUNE FLDR Folder knob While playing an MP3 WMA CD turn the TUNE FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or backward through available folders SCAN RPT random and repeat button When the SCAN RPT button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows CD 1 DISC RPT 1 TRK RPT 1 DISC RDM 1 DISC RPT MP3 WMA CD 1 DISC RPT 1 FOLDER RPT 1 TRK RPT 1 DISC RDM 1 FOLDER RDM 1 DISC RPT 1 DISC RPT the entire disc will be repeated 1 TRK RPT the current track playing will be repeated 1 DISC RDM all tracks will be played randomly 1 FOLDER RPT the folder currently being ac cessed will be repeated 1 FOLDER RDM the tracks in the current folder being accessed will be played randomly REAR CTRL Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rear seat audio controller on Rear Controls UN LOCKED will display Pressing the REAR CTRL button again will turn the rear seat audio control ler off Rear Controls LOCKED will display If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat audio controller the display will show Rear Controls Not Available 4 38 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Press and hold the REAR CTRL button for ap proximately 1 5 seconds to turn the rear display screen on Rear Display
324. le in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by touching the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level touch the BACK key 8 00 o TIM G3 Treble TIME GS EMIT eich TEIN Eom i Push ENTER to adjust setting 231 Balance Speed Sensitive Vol B Bass MM G5 l Treble MMM G E p Balance qe IMM wan lE aaa aai H H Precision Phased Audio Enhaces stereo imaging and sound Precision phased audio To turn on or off the precision phased audio press the SETTING button Then touch the Au dio key the audio settings screen will be dis played Touch the Precision Phased Audio ON key If the amber indicator light is displayed the precision phased audio is enabled Touching the Precision Phased Audio ON key again will turn off the precision phased audio the indicator light will disappear When this item is turned on super high pitch sound and super low pitch sound are empha sized and midrange sound is played naturally While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by touching the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level touch the BACK key Clock set For setting the clock see Clock under the Control panel buttons color screen with navi gation system heading earlier in this section Monitor climate audio phon
325. les or disables the wireless headphones It is possible to operate the DVD player by remote control Headphones are a wireless type and no cables are necessary You can use them in almost all the ranges in the rear seat It is not possible to use the headphones in the front seat DISC AUX button Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while watching the images Press the DISC AUX button on the instrument panel and turn the display to the DVD mode When a DVD is loaded it will be replayed auto matically The operation screen will be turned on when the DISC AUX button located on the instrument panel is pressed while a DVD is being played and it will turn off automatically after a period of time To turn it on again press the DISC AUX button once more DVD operation keys To operate the DVD drive touch the preferred key or select the preferred key displayed on the op eration screen using the INFINITI controller EE PAUSE key Touchthe II PAUSE key to pause the DVD To resume playing the DVD touch the gt PLAY key To pause the DVD it is also possible to press the Il button on the keypad of the remote controller gt PLAY key Touch the gt PLAY key to start playing the DVD for example after pausing the DVD To start playing the DVD it is also possible to press the gt button on the keypad of th
326. let can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury 6 In case of emergency PIQUA E E cae seeece gees ase ass 6 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 6 2 Changing a flat Tire crsissrsesi erines toned sd si 6 2 Jump Saing sececeececeteetennes PENE EEn EE 6 8 enaere laie E ete E Sant 6 10 If your vehicle overheatsS 05 Towing your vehicle 0 00 e eee eee Towing recommended by INFINITI Vehicle recovery freeing a stuck vehicle FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pres sure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If equipped the system also displays pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the TPMS will acti vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 26 km h For more details refer to Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section Tire pressure information in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section and Tir
327. letely 4 28 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The CF player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment tempera ture is extremely high Decrease the tem perature before use Do not expose a CF card to direct sunlight Confirm that a CF card is inserted correctly Compact Disc CD CompactFlash CF with MP3 or WMA Terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD CF can reduce the file size by approximately 10 1 ratio Sampling 44 1 kHz Bit rate 128 kbps with virtually no perceptible loss in quality MP3 compres sion removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn t hear WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio format created by Mi crosoft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Sampling frequen
328. lind an oncom ing driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident If headlights are not aimed correctly immediately take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly When the xenon headlight is initially turned on its brightness or color varies slightly However the color and brightness will soon stabilize The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on off opera tion It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals for example when the vehicle stops at a traffic signal Even when the daytime running lights are active Canada only the xenon headlights do not turn on This way the life of the xenon head lights is not reduced A CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out the brightness will drasti cally decrease the light will start blink ing or the color of the light will be come reddish If one or more of the above signs appear contact an HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH INFINITI dealer Lighting A When turning the switch to the PG posi tion the front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights come on 2 When turning the switch to the 2 posi tion the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on Instruments and controls 2 25 Autolight system The autolight system allo
329. lls below approxi mately 20 MPH 32 km h When the selector lever is shifted to a posi tion other than D Drive When the parking brake is applied When the VDC operates except ABS which is functional with ICC system opera tion CRUISE Warning light When the system is not operating properly the chime sounds and the orange system warning light will illuminate in the instrument panel Action to take If the warning light comes on park the vehicle in a safe place Turn the engine off restart the engine resume driving and then perform the setting again If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealer Starting and driving 5 37 BRAKE ASSIST WITH PREVIEW FUNCTION for Intelligent Cruise Control System equipped models BRAKE ASSIST When the force applied to the brake pedal ex ceeds a certain level the Brake Assist is acti vated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force AWARNING The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device It is the driv er s responsibility to stay alert drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times PREVIEW FUNCTION When the Preview Function identifies the need to
330. lly unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the button Opening any doors Pushing the ignition switch 3 14 Pre driving checks and adjustments The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The light can be turned off without waiting for 15 seconds by performing one of the following op erations Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key Switching the room light switch to the OFF position Opening windows The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simulta neously To open the windows press the but ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked The door windows will open while pressing the button on the Intelligent Key The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key Releasing the rear lift gate Press the T button for longer than 0 5 sec onds to open the rear lift gate The rear lift gate release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key Pushing the request switch on the driver or passenger door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle ae aaa WPD0362 Silencing the horn beep feature Using the panic alarm If desired
331. ly brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed 5 8 Starting and driving Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain Prop erly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack and evenly distribute the load Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible Do not equip the ve hicle with tires larger than specified in this manual This could cause your ve hicle to roll over Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off road The steering wheel could move sud denly and injure your hands Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim Before operating the vehicle ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds With a higher center of gravity your INFINITI is more af fected by strong side winds Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires even with 4WD engaged For 4WD equipped vehicles do not at tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve hicle movement which could result in
332. m to play a CD For information on playing CDs see Com pact Disc CD player operation earlier in this section 2 Touch the REC key REC CD appears on the screen NOTE The system starts playing and recording the 1st track on the CD when the REC key is selected E XXXXXXX 4 XXXXXX a EEE 1 DISC RPT REC CD 3417 10 STOP C Text _ Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se lected to be recorded to the Music Box hard disk drive The skip fast forward and rewind features are disabled while the CD is recording The recording process can be stopped at any time All tracks that were played before the CD was stopped are stored Individual tracks can be deleted from the hard disk drive after the CD is recorded The system records faster than it plays 4 42 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems If the title information of the track being recorded is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD the title is automatically displayed on the screen For title acquisition from the hard drive music recog nition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote To view the details of the track touch the Text key on the screen or use the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button The track name and album title are displayed on the screen If a track is not recorded successfully due to skipping sounds the symbol is displayed behind the track number
333. mate audio phone and voice recognition systems Guidance Voice Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance Store Location Stores the current location to the Address Book Landmark Icons Shows or hides the points of interests on the displays Phone Command Outgoing Calls Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls Incoming Calls Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken as well as star pound and plus Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 97 Audio Command Satellite Radio Turns to the SAT band selecting the station last played Music Box Turns to the Music Box hard disk drive audio system CD Starts to play a CD Vehicle Information Command Climate Control Command COMMAND ACTION Climate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode Climate Control Off Turns the climate control system off 4 98 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Information gt User Guide i Getting Started E LEN Using the Address Book BI 2 Finding a Street Address g 2 Plecingcais i ae rl DOWN Push the ENTER switch to select Displaying user guide You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide which con tains basic instructions and tu
334. mended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Anti freeze or equivalent A CAUTION e Do not substitute engine anti freeze coolant for window washer solution This may result in damage to the paint Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water BATTERY Keep the battery surface clean and dry Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge AWARNING Do not expose the battery to flames an electrical spark or a cigarette Hydro gen gas generated by the battery is ex plosive Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury After touch ing a battery or battery cap do not touch or rub your eyes Thoroughly w
335. methods Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch Push and hold the ACCEL RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de sire release the switch Push and release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed in creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following three methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch Re lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed Push and release the COAST SET switch Each time you do this the set speed de creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle re turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM if so equipped The Intelligent Cruise Control ICC system au tomatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you according to that vehi cle s speed or at the set speed if the road ahead is clear The ICC function has two cruise control modes Vehicle to vehicle distance control mode for maintaining a selected distance between a vehicle up to the preset speeds Conventional fixed speed cruise control mode for cruising at pres
336. mpactFlash The system is reading the CF card inserted in the slot No CompactFlash card A CF card is not inserted in the slot CompactFlash read error The system cannot read the CF card Unplayable file The system cannot play a music file No audio file The CF card inserted in the slot or its folder does not contain any music files Compatibility with other media If a commercially available CompactFlash adapter is inserted into the slot other memory media can also be used MUSIC BOX HARD DRIVE AUDIO SYSTEM The Music Box Hard Drive audio system can store songs from CDs being played The system has a 9 3 gigabyte GB storage capacity and can record up to 200 hours approximately 2 900 songs The following CDs can be recorded in the Music Box Hard Drive audio system CDs without MP3 WMA files Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio Hybrid CD DA specification in Super Audio CDs Compact Disc Digital Audio CD DA speci fication in CD Extras e First session of multisession disc Extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C and above 158 F 70 C could affect the performance of the hard disk NOTE If the hard drive needs to be replaced due to a malfunction all stored music data will be erased Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 41 XXXXXX oe 4 XXXXXX A Ps mmm iE aN E 1 DISC RPT Recording CDs 1 Operate the audio syste
337. ms 4 103 Continuous Learning E settings gt Speaker Adaptation When this item is turned to ON you can have the Lo system learn the voice commands in succession aa rT without selecting commands one by one J Store Resut E Resetresut i Continuous Learning BI po SS Speaker Adaptation function settings Edit Name Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen Store Result When this item is turned to ON the Voice Rec ognition system can easily recognize the user s voice that it has learned Reset Result Resets the user s voice that the Voice Recogni tion system has learned 4 104 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number one until the problem is resolved Displays COMMAND NOT RECOG NIZED or the system fails to interpret the command correctly The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in the phonebook Ensure that the command format is valid see Standard Mode command list or Alternate Command Mode command list earlier in this section Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise l
338. n For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet 8 40 Maintenance and do it yourself l 2 Wear indicator Location mark Tire wear and damage AWARNING Tires should be periodically in spected for wear cracking bulg ing or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire s should be replaced The original tires have built in tread wear indicators When the wear indicators are visible the tire s should be replaced Tires degrade with age and use Have tires including the spare over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob vious Replace the tires as neces sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in jury If it is necessary to repair the spare tire contact an INFINITI dealer For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire use the same size tread design speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical
339. n Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle Do not allow the immobilizer system key which contains an electrical transponder to come into contact with salt water This could affect system function 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments DOORS When the doors are locked using one of the following methods the doors can not be opened using the inside or outside door handles The doors must be unlocked to open the doors AWARNING Always have the doors locked while driving Along with the use of seat belts this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open ing the doors and will help keep out intruders e Before opening any door always look for and avoid oncoming traffic Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents LPD0240 Driver s side LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time Turning the key toward the front 4 of the vehicle locks all doors Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door From that position returning the key to neutral 3 where the key can only be
340. n ing while driving Do not drive with the lift gate open This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the lift gate LPD0247 Rear pillar switch OPERATING THE POWER LIFT GATE NOTE To open close or reverse the power lift gate the shift selector must be in P Park Also the power lift gate will not operate if battery voltage is low Additionally the glass hatch must be fully closed in order to open close or reverse the power liftgate LPD0283 Instrument panel switch Power Open The power lift gate automatically moves from the fully closed position to the fully open position in approximately 5 8 seconds The power open feature can be activated by the switch on the keyfob the instrument panel switch and by the outside opener handle The hazard lights flash and a chime sounds to indicate the power open sequence has been started The lift gate can be opened by the instru ment panel switch and the keyfob even if the vehicle is locked The lift gate will individually unlock and open Once the lift gate is closed its lock will align t
341. n switch is in the OFF position If this warning illuminates move the shift selector to the P Park position or start the engine If the shift selector is moved to the P Park position the lock warning will appear Refer to Lock warning in this section For additional information about Intelligent Key see INFINITI Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator Intelligent Key model This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power If this indicator illuminates replace the battery with a new one See Battery replacement in the Maintenance and do it yourself section 4WD shift indicator Z3 3 model While the engine is running the 4WD shift indi cator will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch The 4WD shift indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other Transfer 4LO position indicator E374 model This indicator illuminates when the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position with the ignition switch placed in the ON position If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position and the indicator blinks stop the vehicle drive slowly forward and the indicator will turn on When you shift between 4H and 4LO stop the vehicle move the shift selector to the N Neutral position then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H
342. n and select the Others key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button to view information on the naviga tion and voice recognition systems Voice recognition For Voice Recognition settings refer to INFINITI Voice Recognition system later in this section Navigation version Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Traffic Info Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Where am I Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item GPS Satellite Info Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Settings j j Adjust tone and advanced audio settings HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed the SET TINGS screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and modes that are available for your vehicle Use the INFINITI controller to select each item to be set and press the ENTER button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 11 Push DAY NIGHT button to resume display Display settings Select the Display key and press the ENTER button The Display settings screen will appear Brightness contrast Select the Brightness key or the Contrast key to adjust the brightness or co
343. n order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector read the manu facturer s recommendations Some fabric pro tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens AWARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This can also affect the opera tion of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury 7 4 Appearance and care A CAUTION Never use benzine thinner or any simi lar material Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly Do not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners as they may damage the leather s natural finish Never use fabric protectors unless rec ommended by the manufacturer Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may dam age the lens cover AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior If you use an air freshener take the following precautions Hanging type air fresheners can cause per manent discoloration when they contact ve hicle interior surfaces Place the air fresh ener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface
344. n this section for head restraint adjustment removal and installation information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it Is interfering with the proper booster seat fit try another seating position or a different booster seat Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child s hips Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions for adjusting the seat belt routing Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top middle portion of the child s shoulder Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing Follow the warnings cautions and instruc tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three point type seat belt with retractor earlier in this section 7 If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 51 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System SRS sec tion
345. n unlock automatically This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH 24 km h All doors unlock automatically when the ig nition switch is placed in the OFF position The automatic lock and unlock functions can be deactivated or activated indepen dently of each other To deactivate or activate the automatic door lock or unlock system per form the following procedure 1 Close all doors 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Do one of the following within 20 seconds of performing Step 2 To change AUTO UNLOCK settings push and hold the power door lock switch tothe if position UNLOCK for more than 5 seconds 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments To change AUTO LOCK settings push and hold the power door lock switch to the position LOCK for more than 5 seconds When activated the hazard warning lights will flash twice When deactivated the haz ard warning lights will flash once The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors When the lever is in the lock position
346. na ne EA A 2 7 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 8 CHECKING DUIDS cancian52 ener es ceded tenes ewe 2 8 VV AGING IONES 24 coe see gceeneaedeeeeeeeentene ss 2 8 indicator lighis sess aes cutecesceeteee uqeeee wees 2 13 Audible reminders 00 ccc eee eee eee 2 15 Vehicle Information Display 05 2 16 Vehicle information display warnings and oe i o cc oncdGatanteoredueectenuaeeenscwso 2 17 Security SystemS ssssssunrara nern nrn nrar 2 20 Vehicle security system 02002e eee 2 20 INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system 2 21 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 22 SWIC ODEON capscapcrrateranes unir peere te 2 22 Rear window wiper and washer switch 2 23 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch 2 24 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 24 Xenon NCACNOM Ss 2acc4ds cet eeeeeaeseseaes 2 24 Headlight control switch a sci cv lt a eae ud es wade ere 2 25 Daytime running light system Canada only 2 28 Instrument brightness control 005 2 28 Tra Signal SWOR s 405 005 cee eee cies rriet bree 2 29 POG NGM SWNCH ce ccsuaevecstedamancunsswen eae 2 29 Hazard warning flasher switch 00 0000 2 29 Ci necurcewegaeaseeneenees wetesee ewes weaned a 2 30 FIedied Sedis 22 csasuceeensraneentaseenietiesey ace 2 30 Heated steering wheel 02 ee eee ee 2 31 Vehicle Dynamic Con
347. ncorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury The pretensioner system activates in conjunction with the front air bag system The pretensioner system also activates with the curtain and rollover air bags in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers Working with the seat belt retrac tor it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to restrain front seat occupants The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts When a pretensioner activates smoke is re leased and a loud noise may be heard This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly After pretensioner activation load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing if necessary to reduce forces against the chest If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys tem the supplemental air bag warning light AF will not come on will flash intermit tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition switch has been placed in the ON or START position In this case the preten sioner system may not function properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest INFINITI dealer When selling your vehicle we
348. ncy be sure to move the vehicle well off the road Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic Turn signals do not work when the haz ard warning flasher lights are on Instruments and controls 2 29 The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving 2 30 instruments and controls HORN HEATED SEATS To sound the horn push the center pad area of the steering wheel The front and 2nd row seats are warmed by built in heaters WARNING 1 Start the engine Do not disassemble the horn Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tam pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal The heater is controlled by a thermostat injury automatically turning the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on 2 Push the LO or HI position of the switch as desired depending on the temperature The indicator light in the switch will illuminate 3 When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off A CAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat Do not put anything on the
349. nd let it idle until it reaches operating temperature then turn it off 3 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 4 Place a large drain pan under the drain plug 5 Remove the drain plug B with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time See Changing engine oil filter later in this section Waste oil must be disposed of prop erly Check your local regulations AWARNING Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep used engine oil out of reach of children A CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not use excessive force Drain plug tightening torque 22 29 ft lb 29 39 N m Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening then install the oil filler cap securely See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity The drain and refill capacity depends on the
350. nd oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual An INFINITI dealer is able to service your envi ronmentally friendly air conditioning system AWARNING The air conditioner system contains re frigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner ser vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 25 AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the VOL volume ON OFF power knob to turn the radio on If you listen to the radio with the engine not running the ignition switch should be placed in the ACC position Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influ ences Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences Using a cellular phone in or near the ve hicle may influence radio reception quality Radio reception Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with state of the art electronic circuits to enhance ra dio reception These circuits are designed to extend reception range and to enhance the qual ity of that reception However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle even when
351. nd the Vehicle Dynamic Con trol off indicator light may come on The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road REAR SONAR SYSTEM AWARNING Always turn and look back before back ing up The RSS is not a substitute for proper backing procedures Read and understand the limitations of the rear sonar system as contained in this section Inclement weather may af fect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it mis aligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measure ment of obstacles or false alarms The Rear Sonar System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the shift selector lever is in R Reverse The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The RSS detects obstacles up to 5 9 ft 1 8 m from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bum
352. nd the trailer Electric Trailer Brakes Electric braking sys tems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller special brake sensing module If electric trailer brakes are used see Electric trailer brake controller in this section Have a professional supplier of towing equip ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing LT10117 example Electric trailer brake controller Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer brake controller Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and jumper harness that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake con troller Technical and consumer information 9 23 To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper harness perform the following proce dure A 1 Open the driver door Move the seat to the i i p rearmost position 4 Q IS oes a 2 Apply the parking brake to access the 3 Locate the jumper harness connector under jumper harness connector the lower portion of the instrument panel The connector is taped to the wiring harness 1 as indicated The connector is marked with a white tag with electric brake connector 9 24 Technical and consumer information Wire color designation for electric trailer brake controller jumper harness WIRE COLOR NOTE RED
353. ne INFINITI Collision Parts INFINITI does not warrant non INFINITI parts nor does INFINITI s warranty apply to damage caused by a non genuine part Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help protect your personal safety preserve your warranty pro tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle And if your vehicle was leased using Genuine INFINITI Parts may prevent or limit un necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease INFINITI designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident Non genuine imitation parts may not provide such built in safeguards Also non genuine parts of ten show premature wear rust and corrosion Why should you take a chance In over 40 states the law says you must be advised if non genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authoriz ing the use of non genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty These laws help pro tect you so you can take action to protect your self It s your right If you should need further information visit us at www InfinitiUSA com for U S customers or www infiniti ca for Canadian customers Technical and consumer information 9 33 MEMO 9 34 Technical and consumer information 10 Index 4WD warninglight 2 11 A Adjusting pedal position
354. ne coolant reservoir tank if necessary Have your vehicle repaired at an INFINITI dealer TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle all State Provincial in Canada and local regulations for towing must be followed Incorrect towing equipment could dam age your vehicle Towing instructions are avail able from an INFINITI dealer Local service opera tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle INFINITI recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions AWARNING Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck A CAUTION When towing make sure that the trans mission axles steering system and powertrain are in working condition If any of these conditions apply dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used Always attach safety chains before towing For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle RV refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual TOWING RECOMMENDED BY INFINITI In case of emergency 6 11 A CAUTION e Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground forward or backward as this may ca
355. ner to clean the sen sor To clean the sensor wipe softly with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and rinse with water then wipe with a dry cloth Do not impact the areas around the sensor Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor Doing so could cause failure or malfunction If the sensor is deformed due to an accident contact an INFINITI dealer Do not attach a sticker including transpar ent material or install an accessory near the sensor This could cause failure or malfunc tion CONVENTIONAL FIXED SPEED CRUISE CONTROL MODE This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 89 MPH 40 to 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal AWARNING In the conventional fixed speed cruise control mode a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle to vehicle distance is detected e Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur Always confirm the setting in the Intel ligent Cruise Control system display Do not use the conventional fixed speed cruise control mode when driv ing under the following conditions When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed On winding or hilly roads On slippery roads ra
356. nferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehi cle s stopping ability Clean the filler cap before removing e Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur faces This will damage the paint If fluid is spilled immediately wash the surface with water 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line If fluid must be added frequently the system should be checked by an INFINITI dealer WINDOW WASHER FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid warning light comes on To fill the window washer fluid reservoir lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer antifreeze Follow the manufacturer s in structions for the mixture ratio Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of win dow washer fluid Recom
357. ns a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water To clean the display never use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 3 e Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction To help ensure safe driving some functions can not be operated while driving The on screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or muted Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper ate the navigation system Settings Display Navigation Comfort amp Conv Volume and Beeps Others Adjust tone and advanced audio settings Touch screen operation With this system the same operations as those for the INFINITI controller are possible using the touch screen operation Selecting the item Touch an item to select To select the Audio key touch the Audio key on the screen Touch the BACK key 2 to return to the previous screen 4 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Volume and Beeps 8 00 rack x O cuidance vo MMIII fel Guidance voice 2 ON Ringer vo APMM Ef incoming cau CMS J gi Outgoing Call tT AM
358. nstruc tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious in jury or death of a child or other passen gers in a sudden stop or collision Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration Do not secure a child restraint in the WRS0416 center rear seating position using LRS0748 the LATCH lower anchors The child restraint will not be secured properly LATCH lower anchor location LATCH system lower anchor locations bench seat l LATCH lower anchor location 2nd row bench seat outboard positions only Inspect the lower anchors by insert if so equipped ing your fingers into the lower anchor The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear area Feel to make sure there are no of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is obstructions over the anchors such attached to the seatback to help you locate the as seat belt webbing or seat cushion LATCH lower anchors material The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower an chors are obstructed 1 34 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0344 LRS0382 LRSO661 LATCH label locations 2nd row captain s LATCH label locations 2nd row bench if so LATCH webbing mounted attachment chairs ir So equipped equipped Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachme
359. nt Key 2 Lock the glove box or console box with the mechanical key 3 Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you See Storage in the Instruments and controls section of this manual INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle These keys have a transponder chip in the key head The master key can be used for all the locks The valet key cannot be used for the console box lock To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone give them the valet key only Never leave these keys in the vehicle Additional or replacement keys If you still have a key the key number is not necessary when you need extra INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys Your dealer can dupli cate your existing key As many as five INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle You should bring all INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your INFINITI dealer for registration This is be cause the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System Af ter the registration process these components will only recognize keys coded into the INFINITI Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3 Vehicle Immobilizer System during registratio
360. ntal restraint system 1 27 Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt Always be sure the 3rd row center seat belt connector tongue and connector buckle are at tached Disconnect only when folding down the rear seat To connect the buckle Q Pull out the connector tongue from the re tractor base 2 Pull out the seat belt tongue from the fabric sleeve 3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiver buckle until it clicks The center seat belt connector tongue and re ceiver buckle are indicated by the gt and lt mark The center seat belt connector tongue can be attached only into the rear center seat belt con nector buckle To fasten the seat belt see Fastening the seat belts earlier in this section AWARNING e Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt connector except when folding down the rear seat When attaching the rear center seat belt connector be certain that the seat backs are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured If the rear center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position serious personal injury may result in an accident or sud den stop 1 28 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO242 Front and 2nd row outboard seats Shoulder belt height adjustment front and 2nd row outboard seats The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad justed to
361. ntrast of the map background Use the INFINITI controller to adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the con trast to lower or higher The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button 4 12 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Display off Select the Display ON key The indicator of the Display ON turns amber and the message above will be displayed briefly When the audio HVAC Heater and air conditioner or any mode button on the control panel is operated the dis play turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons is pressed the display will not automatically turn off until that operation is finished Otherwise the screen turns off auto matically after five seconds To turn the screen on Press the SETTING button and select the Display key and then select the Display ON key Then set the screen to on by press ing the ENTER button or Hold the 2 OFF button for approxi mately two seconds and the message re suming display will appear and the Display ON key will be automatically turned on no amber indicator Background color Select the Background Color key the display color changes between day and night The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button 8 00
362. ntrol system if SO equipped Intelligent Cruise Control ICC system if so equipped information Intelligent Key operation information some indicators and warnings other information 2 16 instruments and controls For details about the Intelligent Key system see INFINITI Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS 1 Door and liftgate open warning 2 Engine start operation indicator 3 No key warning WARNING o 0 RANGE 000 R WARNING 0 0 a LOW 10 Cele WASHER 14 CRUISE SET WARNING RELEASE PARKING BRAKE Lock warning 8 Transfer 4LO position indicator PSJ Shift P warning model l S 9 Automatic transmission position indicator Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator j 4WD shift indicator p377 model instruments and controls 2 17 10 Cruise main switch indicator if so equipped Intelligent Cruise Control ICC system main switch indicator if so equipped 11 Cruise set switch _ indicator Intelligent Cruise Control ICC system set switch in dicator 12 Parking brake warning 13 Low fuel warning 14 Lower windshield washer fluid warning Door and liftgate open warning This warning illuminates when a door the liftgate or the liftgate glass has been opened when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position Engine start operation indicator This indicator illuminates when th
363. ntrols LIC0557 WIC1197 Bottle holder A CAUTION Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers 2ND ROW CENTER CONSOLE if so equipped Pull up on the lever to open the console box lid Removing the 2nd row center console box To remove the 2nd row center console box Q Lift out the cup holder tray 2 Pull up on the handle to tilt the console box up 3 Move the console box toward the front of the vehicle and lift it out To reinstall the 2nd row center console box 1 Slide the console box over the base toward the rear of the vehicle 2 Push down to lock the console box in place 3 Replace the cup holder tray RF n aa E e a maA EEA CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN To open the cargo area storage bin pull down on the tab and pull the lid off instruments and controls 2 43 AWARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo Never allow anyone to ride in the lug gage area It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these
364. nts that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle With this sys tem you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child re straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH This information may also be in the in structions provided by the child restraint manu facturer Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 35 Top tether anchor AWARNING If the cargo cover if so equipped con tacts the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor re move the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its attachment location If the cargo cover is not removed it may damage the top tether strap during a collision A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether LRS0662 strap is damaged LRS0340 LATCH rigid mounted attachment Do not allow cargo to contact the top 2nd row captain s chairs if so equipped The child restraint top tether strap must be used tether strap when it is attached to the Top tether anchor point locations when installing the child restraint with the LATCH top tether anchor Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top Anchor points are located in the following loca tether strap Cargo that is not properly tions secured or cargo that contacts the top lower anchor attachments or seat belts See
365. o adjust the vol ume The headphones will automatically be turned off in 30 seconds if there is no sound during that period To prevent the battery from being dis charged keep the power supply turned off when not in use NOTE For optimum infrared headphone perfor mance increase the volume on the rear seat controller to the maximum level and adjust the infrared headphone volume us ing the volume control on the headphones Using a lower volume setting on the rear seat controller can cause static noise in the infrared headphones 4 58 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems BEFORE OPERATING THE DVD MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Precautions Start the engine when using the DVD entertain ment system AWARNING The driver must not attempt to operate the DVD System or wear the headphones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation A CAUTION Only operate the DVD while the vehicle engine is running Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery e Do not allow the system to get wet Excessive moisture such as spilled liq uids may cause the system to malfunction While playing VIDEO CD media this DVD player does not guarantee complete functionality of all VIDEO CD formats Copyright and trademark The technology protected by the U S patent and other intellectual property rights owned
366. o be accessed from within the INFO menu after pressing the INFO button Speaker Adaptation Starts a system training procedure to learn the specific sounds of your voice See Speaker ad aptation function later in this section Alternate Command Mode For advanced operation an Alternate Command Mode is provided This setting enables control of the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi tion to additional commands for the Phone and Navigation systems With this setting active the system does not announce or display the avail able commands at each step When this mode is activated the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options Minimize Voice Feedback Reduces the amount of the information spoken for each voice instruction 4 102 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems B Command List Pfuwe EI Speaker Adaptation H E Settings gt Voice Recognition E Alternate Command Mode HI Minimize Voice Feedback SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION The Voice Recognition system has a function to learn the user s voice for better voice recognition performance The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons Having the system learn the user s voice 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel highlight the Others key on the display and then press the ENTER button 2 Highlight the Voice Recognition key and then press the ENTER button 3 Highlig
367. o or CD which was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the VOL ON OFF control knob Turn the VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driv ing speed changes AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Balance and Fade Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Balance Fade To adjust Bass Treble Balance and Fade press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears in the display Turn the tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO control knob re peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Otherwise the radio or CD display will automati cally reappear after about 10 seconds 4 34 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings G Adjust tone and advanced audio settings Speed Sensitive Volume SSV To change the SSV mode from OFF 0 to 5 press the SETTING button Then touch the Au dio key and the audio settings screen will be displayed Touch the key or key to change the SSV Whi
368. o the vehicle s lock or unlock status The keyfob button must be held for 0 5 sec onds before the lift gate opens The lift gate must be unlocked to open it with the outside opener handle The switch on the rear pillar cannot be used to open the lift gate A warning chime will sound if the shift selector is moved out of P Park during a power open operation Power Close The power lift gate automatically moves from the fully open position to the secondary position When the lift gate reaches the secondary posi tion the cinching motor engages and pulls the lift gate to its primary latch position Power close takes approximately 7 10 seconds The power close feature can be activated by the switch on the keyfob the instrument panel and the rear pillar The hazard lights flash and a chime sounds to indicate the power close sequence has been started Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 19 f the outside opener handle is activated while the cinching motor is engaged the cinching motor will disengage and release the latch The keyfob button must be held for 0 5 sec onds before the lift gate closes The switch on the rear pillar can only be used to close the lift gate if the cancel switch is not in the on position Reverse The power lift gate will reverse direction immedi ately during power open or power close if the keyfob instrument panel or rear pillar switch is pushed or if the outside handle
369. ob jects may become dangerous projec tiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate Immediately after inflation several front air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may se verely burn yourself e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or front end structure This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing mate rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers on the seat that are not specifi cally designed to assure proper air bag operation Additionally do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant cl
370. of chil dren and pets 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations ENGINE OIL las iy Sm Se CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL l Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature Turn off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Re insert it all the way 5 Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level It should be between the H High and L Low marks This is the normal oper ating oil level range If the oil level is below the L Low mark remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening Do not overfill 6 Recheck oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of operating conditions A CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly Op erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by warranty CHANGING ENGINE OIL Change the engine oil and filter according to the maintenance intervals shown in the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide Vehicle set up 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 2 Start the engine a
371. of the instrument panel to open and close the power vent windows The windows cannot be operated separately To open the power vent windows press and hold the switch To close the windows pull up and hold the switch 2 50 Instruments and controls The power vent windows operate when the igni tion switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the driver s or passenger s door is opened during this 45 second period power to the vent windows is cancelled MOONROOF SN DOWN CLOSE J6 AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The auto matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec onds even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position If the driver s door or the front passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the moon roof is canceled Sliding the moonroof To fully open the moonroof push the switch to ward the open position To fully close the moonroof push the switch toward the close position To open or close the moonroof part way push the switch in any direction 6 while the moonroof is sliding open or closed to stop it in the desired position Tilting the moonroof To tilt the moonroof up push the tilt switch to ward the up position When the moonroof is open it will automatically close and then tilt up
372. oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This could cause the nuts to become loose Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve hicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 98 ft lb 133 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times It is recom mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure COLD pressure After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure the display of the tire pres sure information may show higher pres sure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km This is because the tire pressure increases as the tire temperature rises This does not indicate a system malfunc tion 5 Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip ment in the vehicle In case of emergency 6 7 AWARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se cured after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop The spare tire is designed for em
373. oks P 6 13 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 3 EXTERIOR REAR 0 4 Illustrated table of contents 13 14 Roof rack P 2 46 Rear window defroster P 2 24 Glass hatch P 3 22 Rear window washer P 2 23 Glass hatch release P 3 22 Rearview monitor P 4 18 Towing Trailer hitch if so equipped P 9 16 Lift gate release P 3 18 Rear sonar system P 5 52 Replacing bulbs P 8 29 Power vent windows P 2 50 Fuel filler cap fuel recommendation P 3 23 P 9 3 Fuel filler door P 3 23 Child safety rear door locks P 3 6 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Rear ventilators P 4 21 Storage P 2 36 INFINITI Mobile Entertainment System MES if so equipped P 4 54 Moonroof P 2 50 Map lights P 2 54 Sun visors P 3 26 HomeLink P 2 54 Glove box P 2 36 Seats P 1 2 Cup holders P 2 40 Luggage storage P 2 43 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 5 INSTRUMENT PANEL 32 30 181716 15 33 31 29 28 22 20 26 0 6 Illustrated table of contents Vents P 4 21 Headlight fog light turn signal switch P 2 24 Steering wheel switch for audio control and Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System P 4 51 4 70 Driver supplemental a
374. olts are securely mounted e When towing with the hitch ball mounted to the rear bumper do not make sharp turns The trailer may con tact the bumper and cause damage to the bumper or trailer 9 22 Technical and consumer information Tire pressures When towing a trailer inflate the ve hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer s specifications Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch not to the vehicle bumper or axle The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners Trailer lights A CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system a commercially available power type module converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source The module converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits Using a module converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle s electrical sy
375. ommend your INFINITI dealer for servicing A CAUTION e Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used e Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora tion in driveability and automatic trans mission durability and may damage the automatic transmission which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle lim ited warranty The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment POWER STEERING FLUID The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122 176 F 50 80 C or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera tures of 32 86 F 0 30 C If the fluid is at or below the MIN line add Genu ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX depending on system fluid temperature Remove the cap and fill through the opening A CAUTION e DO NOT OVERFILL e Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent Genuine Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 BRAKE FLUID For further brake fluid specification information refer to Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con tainer Old i
376. on flammable materials such as dry grass e Do not leave children unattended inside waste paper or rags They may ignite the vehicle They could unknowingly ac and cause a fire tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri Safe parking procedures require that ous accidents both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P Park Fail 1 Firmly apply the parking brake ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re 2 Move the shift selector to the P Park sult in an accident Make sure the shift position selector has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved with out depressing the foot brake pedal 3 To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline It is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated 5 48 Starting and driving POWER STEERING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump driven by the engine to assist steering If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks you will still have control of the vehicle However much greater steering effort is needed especially in sharp turns and at low speeds AWARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to operate BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will s
377. on is completed Operating tips Say a command after the tone Voice com mands cannot be accepted when the icon is Commands that are available are always shown on the display and spoken through voice menu prompts Commands other than those that are displayed are not accepted Please follow the prompts given by the sys tem If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice Press the switch on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen If you want to cancel the command press and hold the f switch The message Voice cancelled will be announced If you want to adjust the volume of the sys tem feedback push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 85 General rule Only single digits O zero to 9 can be used When saying the phone number 800 662 6200 the system will accept eight hundred in addition to eight zero zero or eight oh oh 500 700 and 900 are also supported Examples e 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero
378. on of the FSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects Starting and driving 5 53 The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground If your vehicle sustains damage to the front bumper fascia leaving it mis aligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measure ment of obstacles or false alarms The Front Sonar System FSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the front bumper when the shift selector is in a forward gear The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects The FSS detects obstacles up to 3 ft 1 0 m from the front bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 12 in 80 0 cm away the tone will sound con tinuously If the FSS detects a stationary or re ceding object further than 12 in 30 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only 5 54 Starting and driving 3 seconds Once the system detects an ob
379. on of this manual The VDC OFF light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving have the VDC system checked by an INFINITI dealer While the VDC system is operating you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating but this is normal AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings When a disc brake pad requires replacement it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver s door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi tion a chime sounds when the driver s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on Turn the headlight control switch off before leav ing the vehicle Instruments and controls 2 15 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY The vehicle information display f is located to the left of the speedometer It displays such items as automatic transmission position indicator cruise co
380. ont and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within O 5 inches 0 13 mm of the reference height measured in step 2 The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2 AWARNING Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage Sway control device Sudden maneuvers wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han dling Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects If you choose to use one contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle hitch trailer and the trailer s brake sys tem Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device Class hitch Class trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2 000 Ib 909 kg Class II hitch Class Il trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weigh
381. onxeeueeracadeeweceeedex panes 3 9 Door locks unlocks precaution 0 3 9 INFINITI Intelligent Key Operation 3 10 How to use the remote keyless entry IMMCUON oy aae i a EE E 3 12 Warming SIGNdlS cec eatedwuesceaseaweceuee neque 3 16 Troubleshooting QUIGG lt 2 ciccewt nevi eenedees 3 17 POOQ 2vecntcenceeadecanedg ae tudes a eee ged 3 18 EM Ole gccpadereadeeneseneeseeds eae eeeeeeeeetse 3 18 Operating the power lift gate 0 eee 3 19 Cancel SWitChins2svenetcinenskuseueban kes eae 3 21 Lift gate release ns cmssesseeeku temeameenekat cane 3 22 EEE E E E E E 3 22 Fueltiller GOOT scenuencn sid eroii kamaa i aa E E 3 23 FUCIMIICI GaP lt 222 22030080026042eeeedeeadends 3 23 Steering wheel 00 cece eee ee eee eee 3 24 Tilt OPStAlON decade deer tos eee ae ates es 3 24 Entr Exit UnCUOn seiss sscrse eer enatecenneeene 3 25 Pedal position adjustment 0c cece eee eee 3 25 ME e sce Seca eect ecu eco E E 3 26 WAIN MINORS 205 ey enida ernan ESEE r ERDEN ce 3 26 aae i EE E eves ease eens enceaes 3 27 Automatic anti glare rearview mirror 3 27 Quiside MINOIS sr esgcreretretriere tu idp RENES 3 27 Automatic drive positioner 000 eee e eee 3 29 Memory storage function 000 eee ee eee 3 29 Entry exit TUNCHON 522 522 e0 00502 eee eececenedda 3 30 System operation sonona rennara nnen eeees 3 31 KEYS D 1 Two Intelligent Ke
382. open the mirror cover The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open MIRRORS AUTOMATIC ANTI GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR The inside mirror is designed so that it automati cally dims according to the intensity of the head lights of the vehicle following you The automatic anti glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operating To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press the O button The indicator light will turn off To turn on the automatic anti glare feature press the button again The indicator light will turn on For information on the automatic anti glare out side mirrors see Automatic anti glare outside mirrors later in this section For information on HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver operation see HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instrument and controls sec tion of this manual NOTE Do not hang any objects over the sensors or apply glass cleaner to the sensors Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors resulting in improper operation OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position Rotate the round switch 1 to select the right or left mirror Adjust each mirror to the desired po sition pushing the round switch Pre driving checks and
383. operation of the switch The larger the number designated on the switch the lower the axis When traveling without a heavy load or on a flat road select position O Instruments and controls 2 27 AWARNING Xenon headlights are extremely bright compared to conventional headlights If the xenon headlights hit the rearview mir ror of the vehicle ahead or the windshield of oncoming vehicle the driver of these vehicles may have difficulty driving be cause of the brightness Use the headlight aiming control switch to lower the light axis See Xenon headlights earlier in this section for additional information DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM Canada only The headlights automatically illuminate at a re duced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the gt 4 position Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime running lights do not illumi nate The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released The daytime run ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position 2 28 Instruments and controls AWARNING When the daytime running light system is active tail lights on your vehicle are not on It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
384. or is limited A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle to vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detec tion zone due to Its position within the same lane of travel Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane A vehicle that is enter ing the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved in the lane If this occurs the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime The driver may have to manually 5 24 Starting and driving control the proper distance away from ve hicle traveling ahead When driving on some roads such as winding hilly curved narrow or roads which are under construction the ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle The detection of vehicles can be affected by vehicle operation steering maneuver or driving position in the lane or vehicle condition If this occurs the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling veh
385. or light Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Turn signal hazard indicator lights l Check suspension warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light it E Engine oil pressure low engine coolant tem Front passenger air bag status light perature high warning light CHECKING BULBS The following lights come on briefly and then go If any light fails to come on it may indicate off if so equipped a burned out bulb or an open circuit in the a ee closed pa mi ie o brake electrical system Have the system repaired and place the ignition switch to the position o voc promptly without starting the engine The following lights ABS or X SLIP 1 ore will come on if so equipped CHECK SUSP WARNING LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi E BRAKE or CO F Bene A AWD cators see Vehicle information display later in l l l this section 2 8 Instruments and controls ABS 1 Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock func tion is
386. oth the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue are secured when using the seat belt or installing a child restraint Do not use the seat belt or child restraint with only the seat belt tongue attached This could result in serious personal injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop 1 26 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt When folding down the 3rd row seat the 3rd row center seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position as follows CAO Hold the connector tongue so that the seat belt does not retract suddenly when the tongue is released from the connector buckle Release the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool such as a key into the connector buckle Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base Insert the seat belt tongue into the fabric sleeve so it will lay flat Then secure the connector tongue into the retractor base AWARNING Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt connector except when folding down the rear seat When attaching the rear center seat belt connector be certain that the seat backs are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured e If the rear center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position serious personal injury may result in an accident or sud den stop Safety Seats seat belts and suppleme
387. outing or tension Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious per sonal injury 1 22 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system e Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti vated it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor See your INFINITI dealer Removal and installation of preten sioner system components should be done by an INFINITI dealer All seat belt assemblies including re tractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by an INFINITI dealer INFINITI recom mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted All child restraints and attaching hard ware should be inspected after any col lision Always follow the restraint manufacturer s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged PREGNANT WOMEN INFINITI recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as pos sible around the hips not the waist Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your che
388. ove box P 2 37 Hazard lights P 2 29 Climate controls P 4 22 17 Power outlet P 2 34 18 Heated seat switch P 2 30 19 Tow mode switch P 2 33 20 Vehicle dynamic control VDC OFF switch P 2 32 21 Shift selector P 5 12 22 Heated steering wheel switch P 2 31 93 Clock P 2 34 24 Power outlet P 2 34 25 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 61 26 Auxiliary jack P 4 39 27 AWD shift switch if so equipped P 5 41 28 Tilt steering wheel control P 3 24 29 Rear or front and rear sonar system off switch P 5 52 30 Pedal position adjustment switch P 3 25 31 Headlight aiming control P 2 27 32 Power vent windows switch P 2 50 33 Lift gate open close switch P 3 18 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details METERS AND GAUGES a Warning indicator lights Tachometer Speedometer Engine coolant temperature gauge Engine oil pressure gauge Odometer Twin trip odometer A T po sition indicator 4WD shift indicator light if so equipped vehicle information display Voltmeter Fuel gauge Instruments and controls 2 3 1 Speedometer 2 Odometer twin trip display 3 Change button SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed 2 4 Instruments and controls Odometer Twin trip odometer The odomete
389. ow tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors A CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts antenna etc on the windows This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors and the TPMS will not function properly Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu minate Some examples are Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle lf a computer or similar equipment or a DC AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not c
390. per refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 in 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a station ary or receding object further than 10 in 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only 3 seconds Once the system de tects an object approaching the tone will sound again The RSS automatically turns on when the shift selector is placed in R Reverse and the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The RSS OFF switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off To turn the RSS off the ignition switch must be placed in the ON position An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off it may indicate a malfunction in the RSS Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS FRONT SONAR SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING Always look around before proceeding The FSS is not a substitute for proper driving procedures Read and understand the limitations of the front sonar system as contained in this section Inclement weather may af fect the functi
391. portant Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet All season tires INFINITI specifies All Season tires on some mod els to provide good performance all year includ ing snowy and icy road conditions All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M amp S on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires INFINITI specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially re duced in snow and Ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions INFINITI recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires If you do not it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Generally snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never ex ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the same size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be use
392. pped with the FM AM SAT radio with compact disc player if the rear passengers turn off the rear speakers and are using head phones they may choose to listen to a different media than the front passengers The rear pas sengers can listen to the radio along with the front passengers or they can listen to a CD VOL volume button The VOL button allows the rear passengers to adjust the headphone volume level The vehicle volume can also be changed if the REAR CTRL is enabled and the rear audio mode is the same as the front Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 53 vig SPEAKER CONTROL button Press this button to turn the rear speakers off and headphones on Press this A button again to turn rear seat speakers back on and headphones off MODE button The MODE button allows the rear passengers to change between AM FM CD DVD and AUX The media options are listed on the face plate of the rear audio controls When a source of media is selected the media label will be illuminated SEEK button In AM or FM mode the SEEK button allows the rear seat passengers to find the next radio station up or down the station band frequency In CD mode the SEEK button allows the rear passengers to find the next or previous selection on the CD NEXT button When the NEXT button is pressed while in AM or FM mode the radio will change to the next preset The NEXT button does not function while in SAT
393. prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch The door will be unlocked but will not open Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY Locking doors OPERATION 1 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi You can lock or unlock the doors without taking tion place the ignition switch in the LOCK the Intelligent key out of your pocket or bag position and make sure you carry the Intelli When you carry the Intelligent Key with you you gent Key with you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door 2 Close all doors handle request switch within the range of opera tion 3 Push any door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you 4 All doors and the rear liftgate will lock 5 The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments NOTE Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open However doors lock with the me chanical key even if any door is open Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a
394. pt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur faces and always drive carefully Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not INFINITI approved for your vehicle or are ex tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy namic Control system may not operate properly This could adversely affect ve hicle handling performance and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not stan dard equipment or are extremely dete riorated the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica tor light may come on 5 52 Starting and driving When driving on extremely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the Vehicle Dynamic Control system may not operate properly and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on Do not drive on these types of roads When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light may illuminate This is not a malfunction Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface If wheels or tires other than the recom mended ones are used the Vehicle Dy namic Control system may not operate properly a
395. r staining Special cleaning products are available at an INFINITI dealer or any automotive accessory store UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un derbody and suspension Before the winter pe riod and again in the spring the underseal must be checked and if necessary retreated GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film A CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could damage the electri cal conductors radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp ened in a mild soap solution especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used If not removed road salt can discolor the wheels A CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels e Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as am bient temp
396. r strap 2 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the floor behind the child re straint First secure the child restraint with the seat belt as applicable 1 Position the top tether strap over the top 3 Tighten the tether strap according to the of the center seating position seatback manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack Make sure the head restraint does not contact the top tether strap 2 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the floor behind the child re straint If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap on the rear seat consult your INFINITI dealer for details 3 Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any LRS0640 slack ord row bench seat If you have any questions when installing a INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP top tether strap child restraint on the rear 3rd row bench seat seat consult your INFINITI dealer for de tails AWARNING In the 3rd row bench seat a child restraint with a top tether strap can only be used in the center position Do not place in an outboard seating position and attempt to angle the tether strap to the center position 1 48 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats AWARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision gr
397. r Phone Phonebook 1 None Add New Please have your phone look for a Downloaded Phonebook 2 None Add New device called MY CAR When the phone connects to MY CAR a PIN will be Automatic Hold 3 None Add New requested Please enter t234 Exiting s vv Use Vehicle Ringtone 4 None Add New this screen will cancel pairing SNone AddNew o O Cancel _ 5 None Add New Cancel T76 i Add or edit phonebook entries KI L T ATT nul ely 2 Select the None Add New key from the 3 When a PIN code appears on the screen PHONEBOOK name list of the phones and press the EN operate the Bluetooth cellular phone to TER button enter the PIN code Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored in the phonebook 1 Press the SETTING button then select the Phone key and press the ENTER button The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit 2 Select the Phonebook key and press the www InfinitiUSA com bluetooth or call the ENTER button INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department for i instructions on pairing recommended cellu 3 Select one of the None Add New keys from the name list of the phonebook and lar phones press the ENTER button When the pairing is complete the screen will return to the Bluetooth setup display 4 74 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition system
398. r Seat Back on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the driver s seat moving backwards for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position the driver s seat moves to the previous position Return All Settings to Default Select to change all the comfort and convenience systems to their default settings an Adjust voice recognition settings Others settings Select the Others key by using the INFINITI controller and pressing the ENTER button Voice recognition language and units setting screen will be displayed Voice Recognition For Voice Recognition settings refer to INFINITI Voice Recognition system later in this section 4 16 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Language Units Use the INFINITI controller to select the Lan guage Units key and press the ENTER button Select which setting you want to change using the INFINITI controller and selecting either the Select Language key or the Select Units key by pressing the ENTER button Select Language Select the English key or the Frangais key to change the language shown on the display If you select the Fran ais key French language will be displayed so please use the French Own er s Manual To obtain a French Owner s Manual please see Owner s Manu
399. r bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body Even with INFINITI Advanced Air Bags seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas 1 60 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants Because of this the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the front air bag module during inflation The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational Front passenger air bag and status light AWARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con ditions Read this section carefully to learn how it operates Proper use of the seat seat belt and child restraints is
400. r draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory LIC0551 Luggage area Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water to contact the outlet Instruments and controls 2 35 STORAGE Console box storage trays CONSOLE BOX Console box storage Pull up on the lever 1 to open the console box lid 2 36 Instruments and controls Console box lock Use the master key to lock or unlock 2 the console box GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle Use the master key when locking or unlocking the glove box AWARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder push and release Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder AWARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident Instruments and controls 2 37 A CAUTION e Do not use for anything other than sunglasses e Do not leave
401. r say change number Number using a natural voice Speaking too slow or u too loudly may further decrease recognition 9 6200 Dial Say 11 Say Dial performance 12 The system makes a call to 800 662 6200 NOTE You can also speak 800 662 6200 10 continuous digits or 662 6200 7 con tinuous digits if the area code is not nec essary However the 3 3 4 digit grouping is recommended for improved recognition See How to speak numbers earlier in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 91 Sy Voice Recognition Phone _ _ ______ _______ amp To exit hold the TALK switch Voice Recognition gt Phone K amp To exit hold the TALK switch WHA1109 LSU0017 Example 2 Placing an international call 2 The system announces Would you like to to the phone number 011 81 111 222 3333 access Phone Navigation Information or Help 1 Press the 4 switch located on the steering wheel 3 Say Phone 4 92 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 Say International Call 3 Voice Recognition Sw Say the entire number or groups of numbers Say 0 9 pound star or plus 5 To pause push the TALK switch 5 Say 011811112223333 3 Voice Recognition gt International call pr 011811112223333 Please continue or Say Dial Pushing the ENTER swit
402. r twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The odometer records the total distance the ve hicle has been driven The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips Changing the display Pushing the change button changes the display as follows TripLA TripLB TripLA_ Resetting the trip odometer Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec ond resets the trip odometer to zero Elapsed time driving distance and average speed information is also available Refer to Control panel buttons in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section later in this manual TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo lutions per minute rpm Do not rev the engine into the red zone 1 A CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone shift to a higher gear or reduce en gine speed Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera ture The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions A CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera ture near the hot H end of the normal range reduce vehicle speed to decrease tempe
403. racteristics of the tire and also pro ways or air will escape If the hissing P275 60R20 240 kPa 35 PSI vides the tire identification number TIN sound of air escaping from the tire is Snare Tire for safety standard certification The TIN heard while checking the pressure P975 60R20 240 kPa 35 PSI can be used to identify the tire in case of a reposition the gauge to eliminate this recall leakage 3 Remove the gauge Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 P215 65R15 95H 65 t 3 Example 1 Tire size example P215 65R15 95H 1 P The P indicates the tire is de signed for passenger vehicles not all tires have this information 2 Three digit number 215 This num ber gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to side wall edge 3 Two digit number 65 This number known as the aspect ratio gives the tire s ratio of height to width 8 36 Maintenance and do it yourself 4 5 18 t 5 WDI0395 R The R stands for radial Two digit number 15 This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches Two or three digit number 95 This number is the tire s load index It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support You may not find this information on all tires be cause it is not required by law 7 H Tire speed rating You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating DOT XX XX XXX XXXX DOT t 1 XX XX t t 2
404. raint system 1 45 1 46 WRS0681 Forward facing step 6 6 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point rear seat installation only See In stalling top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor WRS0698 Forward facing step 8 8 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 9 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 3 through 8
405. rating 9 4 Odometer sc icneseddwd do Ree amp oS 2 4 Oil Capacities and recommended fuellubricants 45 ss sa casa eee 9 2 Changing engine oll 8 9 Changing engine oilfilter 8 10 Checking engine oil level 8 8 Engine Oils aea eeen E 8 8 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Engine oil pressure low engine coolant temperature high warning light 2 10 Engine oil viscosity 9 5 Outside mirror control 3 27 Outside MIMOS s s a x e ace a opaa ww a 3 27 Overheat If your vehicle overheats 6 10 Owner s manual order form 9 32 Owner s manual service manual order MONADO amp 2 a en a a a a a E 9 32 Pp Parking Parking brake operation 5 17 Parking parking onhills 5 48 Pedal position adjustment saaa 3 25 Personal lights aoaaa aaa 2 53 Phone Bluetooth hands free system 4 70 Power Power door lockS 1 42 ah asm a 3 5 POWErOUllEL 2 wens ape daeae Ra 2 34 Power rear windows 2 49 Power steering fluid 8 11 Power steering system 5 49 Power vent windows 2 50 Power windows 4 2 47 Rear power windows 2 49 Precautions Maintenance precautions 8 5 On pavement and off road driving DICCAUIONS e ees e o 2 oe ee bee oR a 5 3 Precautions on child restraints 1 31 1 39 1 44 1 49 Precaution
406. rature If the gauge is over the nor mal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible If the engine is over heated continued operation of the ve hicle may seriously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action required Instruments and controls 2 5 FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank The gauge may move slightly during braking turning acceleration or going up or down hills The gauge needle returns to E Empty after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis ters E Empty 2 6 Instruments and controls The ib indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the driver s side of the vehicle A CAUTION if the vehicle runs out of fuel SERVICE ieee j the ENGINE malfunction indicator light MIL may come on Refuel as soon as possible After a few driving trips the ENGINE light should turn off If the SOON light remains on after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI dealer For additional information see Mal function Indicator Light MIL later in this section ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys tem oil pressure while the engine is running The needle should be
407. re Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Main tenance and do it yourself section 2 12 Instruments and controls AWARNING If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch turned ON have the ve hicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible If the light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and in crease the likelihood of tire failure Se rious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could re sult in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire re place it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as po
408. re using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone mod ule Please visit www InfinitiUSA com bluetooth for a recommended phone list and pairing pro cedures Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 71 You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones If the hands free
409. regard ing your INFINITI or your INFINITI dealer please contact our Consumer Affairs department at 1 800 662 6200 In Canada 1 800 361 4792 Thank you READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Owner s Manual carefully This will ensure famil larity with controls and maintenance require ments assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle AWARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE MINDERS FOR SAFETY Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers e NEVER drive under the influence of al cohol or drugs e ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro priate child restraint systems Pre teen children should be seated in the rear seat e ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle e ALWAYS review this Owner s Manual for important safety information For descriptions specified for four wheel drive models a 3 y mark is placed at the begin ning of the applicable sections items As with other vehicles with features for off road use failure to operate four wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read Dr
410. rged the shift selector may not be moved from the P Park position even with the brake pedal depressed To move the shift selector release the shift lock The shift selector can be moved to N Neutral However the steering wheel will be locked un less the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi tion This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged To push the shift lock release complete the fol lowing procedure 5 16 Starting and driving 1 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion 2 Apply the parking brake 3 Remove the shift lock release cover as shown 4 Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down 5 Move the shift selector to the N Neutral position while holding down the shift lock release 6 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park have an INFINITI dealer check the auto matic transmission system as soon as possible AWARNING If the shift selector cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunction ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others Accelerator downshift in D position For passing or hill climbing depress the accel erator pedal to the floor This shifts the tr
411. rio L4W 425 dict A SAFETY DEFECTS US only If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addi tion to notifying INFINITI If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot be come involved in individual problems be tween you your dealer or INFINITI To contact NHTSA you may call the Ve hicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov You may notify INFINITI by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department toll free at 1 800 662 6200 READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces your vehicle may be re quired to be in what is called the ready condi tion for an Inspection Maintenance I M test of the emission control system The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns Usually the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle If a power
412. ris dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele phones while driving If you must make a call while your ve hicle is in motion the hands free cellu lar phone operational mode is highly recommended Exercise extreme cau tion at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 69 A CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos sible from the electronic control modules Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in 20 cm away from the electronic con trol system harnesses Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness e Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer e Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body For details consult an INFINITI dealer e Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will bypass the variable voltage con trol system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Refer to Vari able voltage control system in the Maintenance and do it yourself sec tion later in this manual BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM AWARNING Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution
413. rong radio waves are transmitted such as a TV tower power station and broadcasting station When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com puter When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is dis charged replace it with a new one When the Intelligent Key battery is low an indi cator illuminates in the Vehicle Information Dis play See Vehicle Information Display in the Instrument Control section Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves such as sig nals from a TV and personal computer the bat tery life may become shorter For information regarding replacement of a bat tery see Battery replacement in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section Because the steering wheel is locked electrically unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in t
414. s ar aa neta E U ELLE lt lt n TE Yul 8 00 E EA Voicetag Directory 1 None Add New 2 None Add New 3 None Add New 4 None Add New i Select location to store phone number Select the Transfer via Bluetooth key in order to transfer a phonebook entry from your cellular phone to your phonebook in your Car Operate the cellular phone to send a per son s name and phone number from the memory of the cellular phone The memory sending procedure from the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone manufacturer See the cellular phone own er s manual for more details After the download is registered in the phonebook the system will ask if you want to CD Kult 8 ee gt Settings gt Phonebook Enter Data by Keypad Copy from Downloaded Phonebook Copy from Outgoing Cali Logs Copy from Incoming Call Logs Transfer via Bluetooth X hinn EITE TE N MERT add a voicetag for it The voicetag screen will be displayed If you want to add a voicetag select the Yes key and press the ENTER button For ex ample if the person s name is David speak David while the Store voicetag screen is on the display The David voicetag is stored in the phonebook Voicetag is a useful func tion for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recognition system For more information see INFINITI Voice Recognition System later in this section Settings gt Transfer via Bl
415. s sengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment This information is lo cated on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating maximum weight load limit specified for the front or rear axle This information is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GCWR Gross Combined Weight rating The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle passengers cargo and trailer Vehicle Capacity Weight Load limit Total load capacity maximum total weight limit specified of the load passengers and cargo for the ve hicle This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer the trailer tongue weight must be in cluded as part of the cargo load This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your ve hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Load ing Information label To get the combined weight of occu pants and cargo add the weight of all occupants then add the total luggage weight Examples are shown in
416. s tem See a reputable trailer dealer to ob tain the proper equipment and to have it installed Trailer lights should comply with federal and or local regulations For assistance in hooking up trailer lights contact an INFINITI dealer or repu table trailer dealer Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7 pin trailer harness connector If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4 pin connector an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle Adapters are available at auto parts stores and hitch retailers Trailer brakes AWARNING When towing a trailer load of 3 500 lbs Never connect a trailer brake system di 1587 kg or more trailers with a brake rectly to the vehicle brake system system MUST be used However most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow Several types of braking systems are available Surge Brakes The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers In this type of system there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op eration between the tow vehicle a
417. s seat belts and supplemen tal restraint system section of this manual AWARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor NEVER use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas Damage to paint and other protective coat ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand dirt and water on the ve hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used Appearance and care 7 5 Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro sion to those parts which are not well ventilated Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy road salt use acceler ates the corrosion process Road salt also accel erates the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTE
418. s the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action The system will cancel and a warning chime will sound if the speed falls below approximately 20 MPH 32km h The system will also disengage below the 20 MPH 32km h cut off speed or over the maximum set speed Refer to Approach warning later in this section The following items are controlled when the se lector lever is in any D Drive position When there are no vehicles traveling ahead the vehicle to vehicle distance control mode maintains the speed set by the driver The set speed range is between approxi mately 25 and 89 MPH 40 and 144 km h When there is a vehicle traveling ahead the vehicle to vehicle distance control mode adjusts the speed to maintain the distance selected by the driver from the vehicle ahead The adjusting speed range is be tween approximately 20 MPH 32 km h and the set speed When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel the vehicle to vehicle distance control mode accelerates and maintains speed up to the set speed The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion Starting and driving 5 23 The detection zone of the ICC sens
419. s an in ner tube tube type or not tubeless Maintenance and do it yourself 8 37 T The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown Other Tire related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section Intended Outboard Sidewall is 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 the out ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself TYPES OF TIRES AWARNING When changing or replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type i e Summer All Season or Snow and construction An INFINITI dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and availability Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the low tire pres sure warning system For additional information regarding tires refer to Im
420. s forward backward or sideways you could be injured Whenever you drive off road through sand mud or water as deep as the wheel hub more frequent maintenance may be required See Periodic mainte nance in the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide IGNITION SWITCH AWARNING Never remove the key or turn the igni tion switch to the LOCK position while driving The steering wheel will lock This may cause the driver to lose con trol of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while driving The steer ing wheel will lock This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury Starting and driving 5 9 INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position until the shift selector is moved to the P Park position When turning the ignition switch make sure the shift selector is in the P Park position If the shift selector is not returned to the P Park position the ignition switch cannot be moved toward LOCK 5 10 Starting and driving When the ignition switch cannot be turned to ward the LOCK position when the Intelligent Key is in range proceed as follows 1 Move the shift selector into the P Park position 2 Turn the ignition switch slightly in the
421. s if someone opens the doors or lift gate when the system is armed It is not however a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations Al 2 20 Instruments and controls ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period Never leave your Intelligent Key in the vehicle and always lock the vehicle when unattended Be aware of your surroundings and park in secure well lit areas whenever possible Many devices offering additional protection such as component locks identification markers and tracking systems are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops Your INFINITI dealer may also offer such equipment Check with your insurance company to see If you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features How to arm the vehicle security system 1 Close all windows The system can be armed even if the windows are open 2 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion and remove the key 3 Close all doors and the hood Lock all doors The doors can be locked with the power door lock switch if the door is opened locked and then closed the mechanical key any request switch the Intelligent Key Intelligent Key operation Push the button All doors lock The hazard
422. s on seat belt usage 1 20 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSTEM e w e orie a ee w a a 1 52 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Pre tensioner seat belt system 1 65 Programmable features 4 11 Push Starting s sos os ae ebona ee ol we ee a 6 10 R Radio Car phone or CBradio 4 69 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD layer srs erns Oe ee ea ae 2 4 34 Rear audio controls 4 53 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 51 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 0 0 0 ee ee 9 31 Rear audio controls 4 53 Rear center seat belt 1 26 Rear power windows 2 49 Rear seat airconditioner 4 24 Rear sonar system 5 52 Rear sonar system off switch 2 32 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIICGh o a sos sox a wa i ara ae we a a 2 24 Rear window wiper and washer switches 2 23 RearView Monitor oaoa oaa 4 18 Recorders Event data aoaaa a Gok 9 32 Refrigerant recommendation 9 6 Registering your vehicle in another country 9 9 Remote controller See INFINITI mobile entertainment system 4 57 Reporting safety defects US only 9 30 Resetting the fueleconomy 4 7 Roof rack 2 amp sscan ee 2 46 S Safety Child safety rear door lock 3 6 Child seat belts 1 31 1 39 1 44 1 49 Reporting safety defects U
423. s or headlights are illuminated The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control PERSONAL LIGHTS The personal lights on the overhead console can be swiveled 360 degrees To turn on the light press the button Press the button again to turn off the light Instruments and controls 2 53 MAP LIGHTS To turn the map lights on press the switches To turn them off press the switches again A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery 2 54 Instruments and controls CARGO LIGHT The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three position switch To operate push the switch to the desired position ON The light is illuminated Normal center position The light illuminates when the lift gate or glass hatch is opened The light turns off when the lift gate or glass hatch is closed OFF The light does not illuminate regardless of lift gate position or lock status HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink Universal Transceiver Will operate most Radio Frequency RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and se curity systems Is powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batter
424. s pressed with the system off and the CF card inserted the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and a CF card is inserted press the DISC AUX but ton repeatedly until the center display changes to the CompactFlash mode Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 39 T Compact Flash Ce aren ata i suomi 1CFCARD RPT MP3 CF display mode While listening to CF certain text might be able to be displayed Depending on how the files are encoded on the CF the following text might be able to be dis played by touching the Text key Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed File displays the name of the file currently playing Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name Compact Flash gt Text o O Folder XXXXXXX File XXXXXXX Mp3 Song Album Artist XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name e Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artist s name Press the BACK button to exit the CF text display screen SEEK CAT and TRACK buttons Press the 4 SEEK CAT button while the CF card is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the gt TRACK button while the CF card is playing to skip to the begin ning of the next track 4 40 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems If you press and hold the SEEK CAT re wind button or the
425. self LDI0388 WDI0233 Puddle light Cargo light Use a cloth to protect the housing Use a cloth to protect the housing WDI0415 Rear turn signal light Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire see Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit one or more of your tires Is significantly under inflated The system also displays pressure of all tires except the spare tire on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 26 km h Also this system may not de tect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving For more details refer to Low tire pres sure warning light in the Instruments and controls section Tire pressure informa tion in the Monitor climate audio phone 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself and voice recognition systems section Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving sec tion and Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section Tire inflation pressure Check the tire
426. sh the windshield A CAUTION Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds Do not operate the washer if the reser voir tank is empty Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser voir tank Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen trate and water REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper Q Intermittent INT intermittent operation not adjustable 2 ON continuous low speed operation Push the switch forward 3 to operate the washer The wiper will also operate several times Instruments and controls 2 23 AWARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the window and ob scure your vision Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash the rear window A CAUTION e Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds Do not operate the washer if the reser voir tank is empty Do not fill the win
427. side the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See the troubleshooting guide that follows and Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle the vehicle system may respond differently than expected Move the shift selector to the P Park position The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis When stopping the engine play and the inside warning chime sounds continuously When opening the driver s door to get out The inside warning chime sounds The igniionswichieihithe ACC pasion Place the ignition switch in the OFF of the vehicle continuously position The NO KEY warning appears on the Place the ignition switch in the OFF display the outside chime sounds 3 times _ The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position and the inside warning chime sounds for position approximately 3 seconds The shift selector is not in the P Park position When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle The NO KEY warning appears on the dis The ignition switch is in the ACC position Move the shift selector to the P Park posi play and the outside chime sounds and the shift selector is not in t
428. ss the gt TRACK button while a track is playing to skip to the beginning of the next track If you press and hold the SEEK CAT re wind button or the gt TRACK fast forward button for more than approximately 1 5 seconds the track will play while rewinding or fast forward ing When the SEEK CAT rewind button or the gt TRACK fast forward button is re leased the track will return to the normal playing speed The INFINITI controller can also be used to select tracks Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 43 For more information on how to use the INFINITI controller see How to use the INFINITI control ler earlier in this section Play mode selection To change to another album or artist turn the TUNE FLDR knob SCAN RPT button Pressing the SCAN RPT button while a track is playing changes the play pattern as follows ALL Playlist RPT 1 Playlist RPT 1 TRK RPT ALL Playlist RDM 1 Playlist RDM ALL Playlist RPT ALL Playlist RPT the entire playlist will be re peated 1 Playlist RPT the playlist currently being played will be repeated 1 TRK RPT the current track playing will be repeated ALL Playlist RDM all the tracks in the playlist will be played randomly 1 Playlist RDM the tracks in the current playlist will be played randomly Music Box gt Menu 8 00 Play by Artist Sij Play by Album Play by Date Piay by Mood Play by C
429. ssible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS A CAUTION e The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH 25 km h the TPMS may not operate correctly Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly Master warning light This light comes on when various vehicle infor mation display warnings appear fi Seat belt warning light and r chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver s seat belt is fastened At the same time the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger s seat is occupied For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger Refer to Seat belts in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage ar Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition swi
430. st Never run the lap shoulder belt over your abdominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS INFINITI recommends that injured persons use seat belts Check with your doctor for specific recommendations THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR AWARNING Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly LRS0607 Power front seat shown Fastening the seat belts 1 Adjust the seat See Seats earlier in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 23 2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retract
431. st or other smoke black smoke from vehicles reduces the sensor s visibility When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the cargo area of your vehicle When your vehicle is towing a trailer etc The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor s operation When the sensor is covered with dirt or obstructions the system will automatically be canceled while allowing con ventional cruise control to remain operational If the sensor is covered with ice a transparent or translucent vinyl bag etc the ICC system may not detect them In these instances the vehicle to vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead Be sure to clean the sensor regularly The vehicle to vehicle distance control mode is designed to maintain a selected distance and reduce the speed to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead the system decelerates the ve hicle as necessary However the ICC system can only apply up to 25 of the vehicle s total braking power This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or vehicle speeds change gradu ally If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly de celerates the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough If this oc cur
432. straint system LRSO669 Rear facing step 3 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted LRS0670 Rear facing step 4 4 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt WRS0762 Rear facing step 5 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt WRS0763 Rear facing step 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 41 7 Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat
433. sunglasses in the sun glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight The heat may damage the sunglasses LICO575 MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKET The seatback pocket is located on the back of the driver seat The pocket can be used to store maps 2 38 Instruments and controls LICO569 LICO570 Medium bin if so equipped Storage bins AWARNING Keep storage bins closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop Push the button to open a storage bin Large bin LICO568 Small bin OVERHEAD CONSOLE Push the lid up to close Instruments and controls 2 39 LICO669 Front CUP HOLDERS To open the front cup holders push the cup holder lid To close lower the cup holder lid and push down until it clicks in place 2 40 Instruments and controls A CAUTION Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink If the liquid is hot it can scald you or your passenger Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in an accident LICO553 Adjustable Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder so that the cup is held securely 2nd row rear of front console Rear console if so equipped 2nd row bench if so equipped To open the 2nd row cup holders rear of the front console lower the lid To close raise the lid Instruments and controls 2 41 2 42 3rd row Instruments and co
434. systems 4 47 8 00 Music Box gt Music Box System info 8 00 Music Box gt Music Box Settings 8 00 E E Music Box Used Free Space A T Delete Track Mood Categories a Recording Quality A C E Restore Track Bu Deleted Items a Title Text Priority cops O a Piay Sample Search Missing Titles Delete ALL Music Box Data E Music Box Settings i i a i Restores this track i Shows the arnount of space available for recording i Shows the arnount of space available for recording LHA0965 Music Box settings Title Text Priority Set the priority to CDDB Compact Disc To set up the Music Box Hard Drive audio system Data Base to acquire track information from to your preferred settings touch the Menu key the Gracenote Database or set to CD during playback then touch the Music Box Sys TEXT to acquire the information from CDs tem Info key and then the Music Box Settings e Delete ALL Music Box Data Delete all music data stored on the hard e Automatic Recording disk When this item is turned to ON the Music Box Hard Drive audio system automatically starts recording when a CD is inserted key Recording Quality Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132 kbps The default is set to 132 kbps 4 48 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Gracenote NOTE The information contained in the Gracenote Database is not fully guaran teed The servi
435. t after the door unlock operation When the door handle request switch on the driver s or front passenger s side door is pushed to be unlocked only the corresponding door is unlocked first All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within one minute When this item is turned to off all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Select to turn on or turn off the door lock unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch Intelligent Key Lock Reply Select to change the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when a door handle request switch is pushed to lock Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 15 Select to turn off all sounds made when a door handle request switch is pushed by selecting the OFF key Intelligent Key Unlock Reply Select to change the sound of the Intelligent Key mode used when a door handle request switch is pushed to unlock Select to turn off all sounds made when a door handle request switch is pushed by selecting the OFF key Lift Steering Wheel on Exit Select to turn on or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver s door is opened After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position the steering wheel moves to the previous position Slide Drive
436. t properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in 142 5 cm tall and weighs between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 Ibs 86 kg A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit INFINITI recommends that a child be placed ina commercially available booster seat if the shoul der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo men The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three point type seat belt The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck use the shoulder belt without the booster seat CHILD RESTRAINTS AWARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 31 AWARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in structions for proper use and installa tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers
437. t children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys 1 30 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system tem Air bag system for the front passen ger See Supplemental restraint system later in this section INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint INFINITI recom mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu facturer s instructions for installation and use SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg can be placed in a forward facing child restraint Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations INFINITI recom mends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use LARGER CHILDREN Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided The seat belt may not fi
438. t of 3 500 Ib 1 510 kg Class Ill hitch Class Ill trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5 000 Ib 2 272 kg Class IV hitch Class IV trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10 000 Ib 4 545 kg A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5 000 Ib 2 272 kg Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10 000 Ib 4 545 kg maximum weight rating but your ve hicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load Specification chart earlier in this section Technical and consumer information 9 21 A CAUTION Special hitches which include frame re inforcements are required for towing above 2 000 Ib 907 kg Suitable genu ine INFINITI hitches ball mounts and hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport utility vehicles are available at an INFINITI dealer The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact absorbing bumper e Do not use axle mounted hitches Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys tem brake system etc to install a trailer hitch To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear where practical remove the receiver when not in use Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting b
439. t of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be re clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve hicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 Seat lifter Lumbar support Push the front or rear end of the switch up or The lumbar support feature provides lower back down to adjust the angle and height of the seat support to the driver Move the switch forward or cushion backward to adjust the seatback lumbar area 1 4 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2ND ROW CAPTAIN S CHAIR ADJUSTMENT if so equipped Reclining To recline the seatback pull up on the lever and lean back The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat back for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row The 2nd row captain s chairs can be tipped for ward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row bench seat To enter the 3rd row 1 raise the armrest so it is parallel to the seatback and in the stowed position then lift
440. t on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint is removed store it ina secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed See Head re straint adjustment in this section for head re straint adjustment removal and installation infor mation If the seating position does not have an adjust able head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating posi tion or a different child restraint WRS0680 Forward facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing LRSO667 LRSO668 Forward facing step 4 Forward facing step 5 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 5 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the extended At this time the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental rest
441. t reflectors on narrow roads or in road construction zones In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle Also the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation steering maneuver or driving position in the lane or the traffic condition for example if a vehicle is being driven with some damage Automatic cancellation A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled When the vehicle speed falls below approxi mately 20 MPH 32 km h When the selector lever is shifted to a posi tion other than D Drive 4 3 2 or 1 includ ing the manual shift mode When the wiper is operated When the parking brake is applied When the VDC is turned off When the VDC operates CRUISE WATE AN Vy wn MPH Z Q 4 ITF WS Warning light and display Condition A The chime sounds and the Intelligent Cruise Control system is canceled automatically in the conditions described below The CRUISE indica tor light will appear in the vehicle information display Part of the system display will come on or blink making it impossible to set When the VDC is turned off When the VDC operates When atire slips When strong light sunlight etc is directly shining on the front of the vehicle Action to take When the conditions listed above are no longer present turn the system off using the Intelligent Cruise Control ON
442. t the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD AUTO or 4H position Do not move the 4WD shift With the switch set to the AUTO position Swen wen Maniga turn or reversing distribution of torque to the front and rear Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while wheels changes automatically depending driving on steep downhill grades Use on road conditions encountered ratio O the engine brake and low automatic 100 2WD 50 50 4WD This results transmission gears D1 or D2 for en in improved driving stability gine braking e Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the rear wheels spinning 4WD shift switch operations Starting and driving 5 45 Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H position from 2WD or AUTO ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH 100 km h Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system Never shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 4L and 4H while driving Engine idling speed is high while warm ing up the engine Be especially careful when starting or driving on slippery sur faces with the 4WD shift switch set in AUTO 4WD shift indicator light 5 46 Starting and driving LSD0147 The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the vehicle information display The light should turn off within 1 second after turning the ignition switch to the ON position While the engine is running the 4WD shift indi cator light will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch
443. table eye protectors for example goggles or industrial safety spectacles and remove rings metal bands or any other jewelry Do not lean over the battery when jump starting Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause se rious injury Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan It could come on at any time Keep hands and other objects away from it Vehicle pooeleme started e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal 5 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes 6 Keep the engine speed of the booster ve hicle at about 2 000 rpm and start the en gine of the vehicle being jump started Vehicle with AA A CAUTION battery for Cloth booster Do not keep the starter motor engaged for gt WCE0054 more than 10 seconds If the engine does t start right away place the ignition 3 Remove the vent caps on the battery if so MOs i ye i AK WARNING equipped Cover the battery with an old EE ene ae poston ane wats se Always follow the instructions below cloth to reduce explosion hazard SESS ee ULL ae UU Failure to do so could result in damage to he ec EEEE E E EEST 7 After starting the engine carefully discon the charging system and cause personal e LAOR q nect the negative cable and then the positive injury illustrated eee 1 If the booster
444. tains the set vehicle speed similar to standard cruise control as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead The ICC system displays the set speed The CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display comes on Vehicle detected ahead When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by control ling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain a driver selected distance The stoplights of the vehicle come on and the brake pedal depresses when braking is performed by the ICC system A CAUTION Never place your foot under the brake pedal when the brake is operated by the Intelligent Cruise Control system You may get your foot caught in the pedal When a vehicle ahead is detected the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on The ICC system will also display the set speed and se lected distance Vehicle ahead not detected When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed The ICC system then maintains the set speed When a vehicle is no longer detected the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off Ifa vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is In operation the system controls the distance
445. tch is in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to an INFINITI dealer The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Unless checked and repaired the supplemental restraint system air bag system and or the pre tensioner systems may not function properly For additional details see Supplemental restraint system in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain and rollover air bags systems and or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your ve hicle checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon as possible INDICATOR LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display later in this section LA passenger air bag status ight The front passenger air bag status light 2 will be lit and th
446. tection the next song when playing player will skip to the next song Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order the desired order 4 32 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems AID PEDR 2 PRESET DISC A B C PRESET A B C button DISC AUX button Mil speaker control button REAR CTRL button SCAN RPT button TRACK button SEEK CAT button SCAN RPT TUNE FLDR and AUDIO control knob When the AM FM SAT button is CompactFlash insert slot pressed the satellite radio mode will be Station select 1 6 buttons skipped unless an XM satellite radio amp CD eject button service subscription is active Satellite VOL ON OFF control knob radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii AM FM SAT button and Guam MUSIC BOX button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 33 FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions earlier in this section The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an XM satellite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and then push the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode radi
447. tem and the electrical accessories START This position starts the engine As soon as the engine has started release the ignition switch immediately It will automatically return to the ON position The ignition switch cannot be turned back to the LOCK position unless the shift selector is in the P Park position It can be turned only to the position A CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended pe riod This can discharge the battery INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key If the engine fails to start using the registered key it may be due to interference caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring Re start the engine using the following procedures 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 5 seconds 3 Repeat step 1 and 2 again 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs INFINITI rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
448. tended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 1 2 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the pas senger sits well back and straight up in the seat If the seatback is reclined the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased A CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and or damage FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT Operating tips The power seat motor has an auto reset overload protection circuit If the motor stops during operation wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off This will discharge the battery See Automatic drive positioner in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section for au tomatic drive positioner operation Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de sired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again move the switch forward and move your body forward The seatback will move forward The reclining feature allows adjustmen
449. ter a few driving trips the pressure for each tire will be displayed randomly The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s traveling condition and the temperature In case of low tire pressure a message is dis played on the screen LOW PRESSURE Check All Tires AWARNING When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS 4 8 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Information gt Trip Computer 8 00 6 33 32 18 2 miles 2 8 MPH Driving Distance Average Speed E Elapsed Time Trip computer Press the INFO button then select the Trip Computer key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button The trip computer will display the following items Elapsed Time Journey time since the last reset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59 minutes Driving Distance Distance driven miles or km since the last r
450. th Se cure objects away from the area in which an air bag would inflate See Precautions on supplemental restraint system later in this section Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the front passenger s seat when it is in the fold down position Use of these areas by passengers could re sult in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop Folding the 2nd row captain s chairs if SO equipped To fold the 2nd row captain s chairs flat for maxi mum cargo hauling Q Raise the armrest to the stowed position Remove the 2nd row center console See 2nd row center console in the Instruments and controls section of this Owner s Manual 2 Pull the strap forward located in the center of the seat cushion and fold the seat cush ion toward the front of the vehicle Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 15 3 Then lift up on the recline lever to fold the There is a carpet panel flap that can be seatback flat forward folded toward the back of the vehicle 1 16 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 5 The carpet panel flaps provide a level cargo floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded flat Reverse this process to return the 2nd row captain s chairs to a seating position Make sure to properly raise the seat back to an upright position and push the seat cushion down into place Folding the 2nd row bench seat if so equipped
451. that the 4WD shift indicator light is ON and the ATP warning light is OFF This light indicates that the automatic transmis sion parking function is not engaged If the trans fer control is not secured in any drive position while the shift selector is in the P Park position the transmission will disengage and the drive wheels will not lock Brake or O Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems Instruments and controls 2 9 Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on when the parking brake is applied Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position the light warns of a low brake fluid level If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied stop the vehicle and perform the following 1 Check the brake fluid level Add brake fluid as necessary See Brake fluid in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual 2 If the brake fluid level is correct have the warning system checked by an INFINITI dealer AWARNING Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on Driv ing could be dangerous If you judge it to be safe drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs Otherwise have your vehicle towed because driv ing it could be dangerous 2 10 Instruments and controls
452. that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drive train steering brak ing and other systems An INFINITI Towing Guide U S only is available on the website at www I nfinitiUSA com This guide includes information on trailer towing ca pability and the special equipment required for proper towing 9 16 Technical and consumer information MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load Specification Chart found later in this sec tion The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight When towing a trailer load of 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg or more trailers with a brake system MUST be used The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR should not exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load Specification Chart The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo plus the total trailer load Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling braking and performance The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads but also the places you plan to tow Tow weights appro priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations for example on slippery boat ramps Temperature conditions can also affect towing
453. the ENTER button To adjust the display ON OFF brightness tint color con trast and black level select each key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button Then you can adjust each item using the INFINITI controller After changes have been made press the BACK button to save the settings Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 59 Rear display To adjust the rear display mode press the DISP Display button on the remote controller To adjust the display brightness tint color and contrast select each key using the directional keys on the remote controller Use the left or right key to adjust the level up or down Press the BACK button to apply the settings and return to the previous display WIDE STANDARD PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC DVD With the DVD player you can hear DVD videos video CDs and CDs using headphones Passen gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde pendently of the front seat Press the DISC AUX button located on the front controls to hear the sound of the DVD play through the speakers Press the REAR CTRL button located on the front controls to disable or enable rear seat audio controls For more information on rear seat audio controls see Rear Audio Controls earlier in this section 4 60 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Pressing the button on the front controls turns the rear speakers on or off and enab
454. the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect inside the lens contact an INFINITI dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight assembly High HB3 9005 Low D2R Park 7 3057K amp 916 Sidemarker 916 Front fog light H3 Turn 7440 Puddle light 906 Side turn signal light Room map lights Personal lights Footwell Glove box light Vanity mirror light Step light Cargo light High mounted stop light Rear combination light Tail Stop Backup reversing Turn License plate light See an INFINITI dealer for replacement Always check with the Parts Department at an INFINITI dealer for the latest parts information 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself le i a Ll oa Room map light Front personal lights Step light Puddle light Side turn signal light High mount stoplight Cargo light Rear turn signal light Headlight assembly Fog light LDI0389 Room map lights Replacement procedures l Use a cloth 4 to protect the housing All other lights are either type A B C or D When replacing a bulb first remove the lens lamp and or cover i Indicates bulb removal t Indicates bulb installation Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 LDI0364 LDI0385 LDI0341 Personal lights Vanity mirror Step light Use a cloth to protect the housing Use a cloth Q to protect the housing Use a cloth Q to protect the housing 8 30 Maintenance and do it your
455. the phone number 800 662 6200 the system will accept eight hundred in addition to eight zero zero or eight oh oh 500 700 and 900 are also supported Examples 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 101 Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone num bers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the system will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the system will then ask for the last four digits Say six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor mance NOTE When speaking a house number speak the number 0 as zero or oh If the letter O is included in the house number it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero Settings menu The content of the Settings Menu differs when the system is in the Alternate Command Mode Command List Displays the command list for Alternate Com mand Mode User Guide The user guide provides basic instructions for using Voice Recognition and accessing some voice commands NOTE The user guide can als
456. the position best for you See Precau tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section To adjust pull out the adjustment button and move the shoulder belt anchor 2 to the desired position so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Re lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position AWARNING e After adjustment release the adjust ment button and try to move the shoul der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effec tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If because of body size or driving position it is not possible to properly fit the lap shoulder belt and fasten it an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts The ex tender adds approximately 8 in 200 mm of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position See an INFINITI dealer for assistance if an extender is required AWARNING Only INFINITI seat belt extenders made by the same company which made the Original equipment seat belts should be used with INFINITI seat belts Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not
457. the slot Auxiliary input jack For information see DVD auxiliary input jacks later in this section 4 56 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems POWER button STOP button NEXT TRACK CHAPTER and PREVI OUS TRACK CHAPTER button TITLE button ENTER button 6 DISPLAY button 7 MODE button 8 SUBTITLE button 9 AUDIO button 10 ANGLE button 11 CLEAR button 12 PAUSE button 13 PLAY button 14 FAST FORWARD FAST REVERSE button 15 MENU button 16 NAVIGATION keys 17 BACK button 18 NUMERIC KEYPAD REMOTE CONTROL Refer to Remote control operation later in this section for the function of each button The screen rotates down to view and up into the housing to store when not in use Ensure that the screen is latched securely into the housing when stored FLIP DOWN SCREEN The flip down screen has a wireless remote con trol receiver 1 located at the bottom of the screen A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 57 Headphones Power ON OFF Press the power button to turn the headphones on or off Volume control Turn the volume control knob t
458. the system in extreme humidity conditions less than 10 or more than 75 4 66 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems A CAUTION e Do not use any solvents or cleaning solutions when cleaning the video system e Do not use excessive force on the moni tor screen Avoid touching or scratching the moni tor screen as it may become dirty or damaged e A new disc may be rough on its inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges using the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated e Never attempt to use a DVD that has been cracked deformed or repaired using adhesive Doing so may cause damage to the equipment Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami nation or flaws Otherwise signals may not be read properly Do not write draw or attach anything on any side of the DVD HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD Donot store the DVD in locations with direct sunlight or in high temperatures or humidity A CAUTION e Always place discs in the storage case when e Handle a DVD by its edges Never touch they are not being used the surface of the disc Do not put on any sticker or write anything e To clean a disc wipe the surface from on either surface of the DVD the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion DVD player operation precautions e Do not use a conventional record Do not use the following DVDs as they may cleaner benzine thinner or
459. this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres sure the warning light will illuminate If you select the tire pressure information in the display the LOW PRESSURE warning message will be dis played The tire pressure for each tire will also be displayed Instruments and controls 2 11 When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom mended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening The low tire pressure warning light does not automati cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad justed After the tire is inflated to the rec ommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pres sure gauge to check the tire pressure For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is turned ON The light will remain on after the 1 minute Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer For additional information see Tire Pressu
460. till have braking at 2 wheels BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal However greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis tance will be longer Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving This will overheat the brakes wear out the brake pads faster and reduce gas mileage To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control AWARNING While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerating or downshifting Abrupt braking or accel erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the brakes will not work Braking will be harder Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the v
461. tion When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information FCC Notice This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Opera tion is subject to the following two condi tions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received in cluding interference that may cause undes ired operation This transmitter has been tested and com plies with FCC and DOC MDC rules Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment DOC ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I D CV2V67690 Instruments and controls 2 57 MEMO 2 58 Instruments and controls 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments KGS o2emctedederenvarasaucees ene tseee Ge eters neh 3 2 INFINITI Intelligent Key 2 22005 3 2 INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys 3 3 DOOS 2st neice renew eeoneeiieerseusedeteeensen ces nes 3 4 LOCKING WIKKGY 5 s e2 0u sbeshd oe dee ve eeesae eee 3 4 Locking with inside lock knob 3 5 Locking with power door lock switch 3 5 Automatic door locks ce dcSsctae cee necgh ded ou eek 3 6 Child safety rear door lock 000 005 3 6 INFINITI Intelligent Key s s20re esevenncasene dese ex 3 7 Operating ANGescc
462. tion The vehicle security system will give the following alarm The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently The alarm automatically turns off after ap proximately 50 seconds However the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver s door with the mechanical key or by pressing the M button on the Intelli gent Key The alarm is activated by opening a door without using the mechani cal key or Intelligent Key even if the door is unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch opening the hood How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver s door with the mechanical key a request switch or by pressing the M button on the Intelligent Key INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key If the engine fails to start using a registered INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key for ex ample when interference is caused by another INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key an au tomated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following procedures 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds 2 Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approxim
463. tion fire or an electric shock e Do not strike the camera It is a preci sion instrument Otherwise it may mal function or cause damage resulting ina fire or an electric shock A CAUTION There is a plastic cover over the camera Do not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow from the cover HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and distances to objects with reference to the bumper line A are displayed on the monitor They are indicated as reference distances to objects The lines and colors in the display indi cate distances from the back bumper line in the illustration 1 5 ft 0 5 m red 2 3ft 1 m yellow 3 7 ft 2m green 4 10 ft 3 m green The vehicle clearance lines are wider than the actual clearance Settings gt a Auto Settings gt Display Auto Day aAck Display Brightness Tint 7e Color Contrast 1 6 Toggles display on and off 2 Toggles display on and off ADJUSTING THE SCREEN To adjust the quality of the screen press the SETTING button To adjust the Display ON OFF Brightness Tint Color Contrast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor press the SETTING but ton with the RearView Monitor on then touch one of the adjustment keys Press the or key on the item and adjust the level Do not adjust the Brightness Contrast Tint and Color of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving
464. tires 4 Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back ward Shift back and forth between R Reverse and D Drive Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH 55 km h 5 If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior ss ann ca nakneey a eewrdnde ay ees aren 7 2 PPTeSneCne Sin5 lt 4ucnseavernens Voda ru renidi uses 7 4 NVOGUING EEE E E E E s 7 2 POO Wale yas E E mee deen E E EE E 7 4 WANING a ep eeeacdamon Pen enieenee rie aeeues bin 2 eal Velie arcu stent dates eeeernecaeaeaynees es 7 5 REMOVING SPOS wcciaehesomats paseas nyoga ias 7 3 Corrosion PrOleClONicscs ccccdesdrcesnten tenana 7 5 WNGCIDOOY sospes reitit weed iniia ea ceeuawas 7 3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle GAES araen a ea a d 3 CONOSION sacar sade E E 7 5 Aluminum alloy wheels 00 0005 7 3 Environmental factors influence the rate of COME PANS E acta eeeeed menses 7 3 CONOS IOWceecesesncdbsouasusetueeueskannsee eee 7 5 Tire Ghess0e acca tenn poets aot A 7 3 To protect your vehicle from corrosion 7 6 Cleaning MCI 2660 ap bene cent aes at cas ee nena ma 7 4 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve hicle it is important to take proper care of it
465. to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving 4 Fourth gear Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta geous Do not downshift into the 4 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 4 position 4H 62 MPH 100 km h 4LO 31 MPH 50 km h 3 Third gear Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta geous 2 Second gear Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak ing on downhill grades Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 2 position 2WD and AUTO 62 MPH 100 km h 4H 62 MPH 100 km h 4LO 27 MPH 44 km h 1 Low gear Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or slow driving through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow ing speeds in the 1 position 2WD and AUTO 37 MPH 60 km h 4H 37 MPH 60 km h 4LO 16 MPH 27 km h Starting and driving 5 15 Shift lock release If the battery is discha
466. to the vehicle Starting and driving 5 29 CRUISE W cI tt MPH AALS Hine WSD0219 When passing another vehicle the set speed indicator will flash when the vehicle speed ex ceeds the set speed The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the previously set speed The CRUISE indicator light will appear on the vehicle informa tion display Although your vehicle may be at the set vehicle speed based on ICC system control depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accel erate your vehicle rapidly 5 30 Starting and driving How to change the set vehicle speed To cancel the preset speed use any of these methods Push the CANCEL switch The set vehicle speed indicator will go out Tap the brake pedal The set vehicle speed indicator will go out Turn the ON OFF switch off Both the ON OFF switch indicator and set vehicle speed indicator will go out To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following methods Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch Push and hold the ACCEL RES switch The set vehicle speed will increase by approxi mately 5 MPH 5 km h for Canada Push then quickly release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed will increase by approximately 1 MPH 1 km h for Canada
467. tons to clear the memory until the indicator light blinks after 20 seconds Release both buttons Position the end of the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Using both hands simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held transmitter but ton DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink This could take up to 90 seconds When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapidly flash ing light indicates successful programming To activate the garage door or other pro Instruments and controls 2 55 grammed device press and hold the pro grammed HomeLink button releasing when the device begins to activate 5 Ifthe indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another per son for convenience 6 Press and release the smart or learn pro gram button located on the garage door opener s motor to activate the training mode This button is usually located near the antenn
468. torials for several voice commands 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument panel 2 Highlight the Others key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button 3 Highlight the Voice Recognition key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button Highlight the User Guide key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button Information gt User Guide Ei Finding a Street Address nee a 12 Placing Calls Bi Help on Speaking g JEN Voice Recognition Settings Bi HE Adapting the System to Your Voice B E 3 7 DOWN Push the ENTER switch to select 5 Highlight an item using the INFINITI control ler and press the ENTER button Available items Getting Started Describes the basics of how to operate the Voice Recognition system Using the Address Book Tutorial for using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Tutorial for Finding a Street Address Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 99 Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation Help on Speaking Displays useful tips for how to correctly speak commands in order for them to be properly recognized by the system Voice Recognition Settings Describes the available Voice Recognition settings Adapting the System to Your Voice Tutorial for adapting the system to your voice USING THE SYSTEM Initialization Wh
469. train system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition Before taking the I M test check the vehicle s inspection maintenance test readiness condi tion Turn the ignition switch ON without starting the engine If the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds the I M test condition is not ready If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds the I M test condition is ready If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a not ready con dition drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern an INFINITI dealer can conduct it for you AWARNING Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic con ditions and obey all traffic laws 1 Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C Al low the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H normal oper ating temperature 2 Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH 88 km h then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds 3 Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 60 MPH 86 96 km h for at least 9 minutes 4 Stop the vehicle 5 Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH 55 km h
470. trol VDC OFF switch 2 32 Rear sonar system off switch if so equipped 2 32 Front sonar system off switch If so equipped 2 33 TOW mode SWIC ccacctcnoevetaeececacaetaeseeres 2 33 WGC eunatenswoewouye gece eases tee eee eacees ete 2 34 Adjusting the time sotrcd eddeoeeees age reodase de 2 34 POWErOULCL lt adusat ates so creeeede de E E esse 2 34 DIOMOG to aecseh ser E A E enna nace 2 36 CONSOlE DOK sens ca er endanenecteeecswaenecens 2 36 COVE DO eaicnesace mute renueerecesaressucens 2 37 Sunglasses NOldEl cocci cctdertenctnseusedeadats 2 37 Map POCKCIS lt cccuttcce unetan raina Leeds bee 2 38 Seatback pocket ssn daenacsnoumentworceuemeons 2 38 Overhead Console svi cccevapeceeeetedeuas cones 2 39 Clip NOE sate dosdeuecnsie tc ceucateesnense 2 40 2nd row center console if so equipped 2 42 Cargo area storage bin 0e eee eee 2 43 Luggage hooks oc ssc ccndaecnedess teed udede oe es 2 44 Carga MEE cin Sone eetter eee eeeaerbereescaa ys 2 45 POOLA K ereen cheek eaevats AE ES E EET 2 46 WV INGO WSs 25 vate a raned EE ei EE oe E T 2 47 Power WINDOWS lt 4 occ Sen coe cece here en deete hae 2 47 Power vent WINdOWS 00 cece cece ene ee eens 2 50 MOOD oae cetacean aer ouer ee ENESE ete ee 2 00 Automatic moonroof o 5 0asvenne Laccteunce nena edees 2 50 Honor N esre snra seeeneee Geneceeea eee es 2 52 Console ghi stra ecu ete nee abe nanana ren one 2 53 Personal NOMS 2424 25 te
471. trolled by the system the system does not automatically stop the vehicle If the vehicle speed falls below approxi mately 20 MPH 32 km h the Intelli gent Cruise Control system is automati cally canceled and a warning chime sounds The brake control is also canceled Starting and driving 5 21 The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions To avoid accidents never use the Intelligent Cruise Control sys tem under the following conditions On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow etc During bad weather rain fog snow etc When the windshield wiper is operated at the low speed LO or high speed HI position the Intelli gent Cruise Control system is auto matically canceled When strong light for example at sunrise or sunset is directly shining on the front of the vehicle When rain snow or dirt adhere to the system sensor On steep downhill roads the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent barking may result in overheating the brakes On repeated uphill and downhill roads 5 22 Starting and driving When traffic conditions make it diffi cult to keep a proper distance be tween vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Con trol system if you are towing a trailer The syst
472. troller Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec ognition system If you choose Finding a Street Address or Plac ing Calls you can view tutorials on how to per form these operations using Voice Recognition Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 83 Information gt User Guide Tips on Speaking Commands Say commands when there are minimal background sounds Say voice commands clearly Avoid long pauses between words Say commands after the tone If you find that the system has difficulty recognizing your voice please try using the voice recognition learning mode T Useful tips for correct operation You can display useful speaking tips to help the system recognize your voice commands cor rectly 1 Highlight Help on Speaking and press the ENTER button 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the INFINITI controller al Ee y y fow i a El atest command woe em nimi voice resasa cow H E Settings gt Voice Recognition Voice recognition settings The available settings of the INFINITI Voice Rec ognition system are described 1 Highlight Voice Recognition Settings and press the ENTER button 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the INFINITI controller 4 84 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the O
473. ts Clean the camera Do not use alcohol benzine or thinner to clean the camera This will cause discolora tion To clean the camera wipe with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected Do not use body wax on the camera window If body wax does get on the camera window wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp ened with mild detergent diluted with water 4 20 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems VENTS Adjust air flow direction for the driver s and pas senger s side vents 4 center vents 2 and rear passengers vents 3 and by moving the vent slide and or vent assemblies For the driver s and passenger s side vents 1 open or close by using the dial Move the dial toward the position to open the vents or toward the amp position to close them Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 21 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic Ss PS Se ee ee Driver s temperature control dial AUTO button A C ON OFF button j Fan speed control increase Front window defroster button e MODE button Passenger s temperature control dial DUAL button System OFF Fan speed control decrease Rear window defroster button Air recirculation button AWARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running
474. ts placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation because of the object s weight detected by the occupant classification sensor Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation such as if a child is standing on the seat or if two children are on the seat contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly Using the passenger air bag status light you can monitor when the front passenger air bag Is au tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied The light will not illuminate when the front pas senger seat is unoccupied If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen ger air bag status light is illuminated indicating that the air bag is OFF it could be that the person is a small adult or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly If a child restraint must be used in the front seat the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used If the air bag status light is not illuminated indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash it could be 1 62 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly If the a
475. turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec tion Automatic transmission check CHECK ae warning light When the ignition switch is turned ON the light comes on for about 2 seconds If the light comes on at any other time it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly Have the system checked by an INFINITI dealer ATP Automatic transmission park warning light eyz model AWARNING If the ATP light is ON this indicates that the automatic transmission P Park po sition will not function and the transfer case is in neutral When parking always make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set Failure to engage the transfer position in 2WD AUTO 4H or 4LO could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly resulting in serious personal injury or property damage The warning light may come on when the ignition switch is ON and the shift selector is placed in the P position while shifting the transfer case be tween 4H and 4LO Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD AUTO 4H or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP warn ing light when the warning light comes on Before shifting the 4WD switch into the 4LO position or out of 4LO in the 4H position move the shift selector into the N position Shift the shift selector into the P position and make sure
476. turned off and Standard Mode be used for the best recognition performance For the voice commands for the navigation sys tem refer to the Navigation System Owner s Manual of your vehicle For vehicles in the U S the factory default setting is the Standard Mode See Standard Mode in this section For vehicles in Canada the factory default setting is the Alternate Command Mode See Alternate Command Mode later in this sec tion 4 82 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE The Standard Mode enables control of naviga tion phone and vehicle information With this setting active commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system Displaying user guide If you use the INFINITI Voice Recognition system for the first time or you do not know how to operate it you can display the User Guide for confirmation You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide which con tains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands Information gt User Guide Ei Getting Started a Bi Placing Calls Bi IE Finding a Street Address Hl JEN Help on Speaking il a Push the ENTER switch to select i Voice Recognition Settings ee Press the INFO button on the instrument panel Highlight the Others key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button
477. uel containers Always place the container on the ground when filling Do not use electronic devices when filling Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill ing it Use only approved portable fuel con tainers for flammable liquid 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments flush it away with water to avoid paint damage Insert the fuel filler cap straight into the fuel filler tube then tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the ENGINE malfunction indicator light SOON MIL to illuminate If the ENGINE light illuminates because the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The ENGINE light should turn off after a a SERVICE few driving trips If the ENGINE light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITI dealer For additional information see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the Instruments and Controls section earlier in this manual TILT OPERATION Push the switch Q to adjust the steering wheel up or down 2 to the desired position AWARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident ENTRY EXIT FUNCTION The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the key is
478. uetooth 1 Yilll Add a voicetag 7 When the phonebook download is com pleted the screen will return to the name list of the phonebook There are different methods to input a phone number Select one of the following options for Step 4 above Enter Data by Keypad Input the name and phone number manually us ing the keypad displayed on the screen For in formation on how to use the touch screen see How to use the touch screen earlier in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 75 Copy from Downloaded Phonebook Copy a phonebook from the Bluetooth cellular phone The availability of this function depends on each cellular phone The copying procedure from the cellular phone also varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone own er s manual for more details Copy from Outgoing Call Logs Store the name and phone number from the outgoing Call list Copy from Incoming Call Logs Store the name and phone number from the incoming call list Transfer via Bluetooth Transfer a contact from the Bluetooth cellular phone Availability of this function depends on each cellular phone The transferring procedure from the cellular phone also varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone own er s manual for more details Delete Delete a contact that is registered in the phone book Phone Till new oncom pree wm ome C M
479. uld al ways be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle 1 67 AWARNING e Once a front air bag side air bag or curtain and rollover air bags have in flated the air bag module will not func tion again and must be replaced Addi tionally if any of the front air bags inflate the activated pretensioners must also be replaced The air bag mod ule and pretensioner should be re placed by an INFINITI dealer The air bag module and pretensioner cannot be repaired The front air bag side air bag and cur tain and rollover air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be in spected by an INFINITI dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle If you need to dispose of a supplemen tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact an INFINITI dealer In correct disposal procedures could cause personal injury 1 68 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system MEMO Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 69 2 Instruments and controls INSUMIMENE DANClecenv wcsdyeeueavecededy eedeu sues 2 2 Meters and gaugeS 2ce eee eee eee eee 2 3 Speedometer and odometer a sssusa rnrn 2 4 Eea ne E E E E 2 5 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Fuel gange aecaent ecsee ean sang ecatet peewee sates 2 6 Engine oil pressure gauge 22 05 2 6 NoMe c lt uiesont oan Ene a e
480. uld stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Starting and driving 5 3 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS mal function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alter nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac ing one or more tires or wheels
481. ums in order of the date when they were stored in the system Se lecting an album displays all of the tracks on the album and starts playing the first track Touch the Sort key to re sort albums in one of the following order Rec Recorded Date Name Release Year Artist Search Song Details Set the conditions and touch the Start Song Search key to search for a desired song that is stored in the system The con ditions are as follows Music Tempo All Slow Normal and Fast Decade All 70s 80s 90s 00s 10s and After Group All Male Artist Female Artist Group and Duo Category Rock Pop Latin Jazz R amp B Hip Hop Club Dance Punk Reggae Folk Blues Country Metal Easy Listen ing New Age Soundtrack Gospel amp Re ligious World Classical Children s and Other Search Keywords Input a search keyword using the keypad displayed on the screen For information see How to use the touch screen earlier in this section Edit Albums Select a category Rec Recorded Date Name Released Year and Artist and edit the details using the keypad displayed on the screen For information see How to use the touch screen earlier in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 45 Music Box System Info Displays the following information about the Music Box audio system 4 46 Music Box Used
482. up on the seatback latch located on the upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd row captain s chair and fold the seatback forward at an angle over the seat base This will release the back of the seat so it may be tipped forward Then lift up on the lower corner of the seat base and tip the 2nd row captain s chair forward To exit the 3rd row bench seat lift up on the same seatback latch and fold the seatback forward onto the seat base Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward WRS0369 Outboard seats 2ND ROW BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped Reclining To recline the seatback pull up on the lever and lean back The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat back for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P Park Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5 AWARNING After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries
483. uppliers are now producing reformu lated gasolines These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy genates such as ethanol MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence INFINITI does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your INFINITI cannot be readily determined If in doubt ask your service station manager If you use oxygenate blend gasoline please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and or fuel system damage The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline If an oxygenate blend other than metha nol blend is used it should contain no more than 10 oxygenate MTBE may however be added up to 15 If a methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 5 methanol me thyl alcohol wood alcohol It should also contain a suitable amount of ap propriate cosolvents and corrosion in hibitors If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and or ve hicle performance problems At this time sufficient data is not available to
484. ure that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and the ATP warning light goes off Otherwise the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the P position 5 44 Starting and driving A CAUTION Never shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 4L and 4H while driving The 4H position provides greater trac tion Avoid excessive speed as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures and could damage drivetrain components Speeds over 62 MPH 100 km h in 4H is not recommended The 4LO position provides maximum power and traction Avoid raising ve hicle speed excessively as the maxi mum speed is approximately 31 MPH 50 km h When driving straight shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD AUTO or 4H position Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing Do not shift the 4WD shift switch be tween 2WD AUTO and 4H while driving on steep downhill grades Use the en gine brake and low automatic transmis sion gears D1 or D2 for engine braking e Do not operate the 4WD shift switch between 2WD AUTO and 4H with the rear wheels spinning Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise and tire wear INFINITI recommends driving in the 2WD or AUTO position under these conditions e The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am b
485. urned OFF For small adults it may be turned OFF however if the occupant takes his her weight off the seat cush ion for example by not sitting upright by sitting on an edge of the seat or by otherwise being out of position this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF In addition if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode child restraint mode this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag INFINITI recommends that pre teens and chil dren be properly restrained in a rear seat INFINITI also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat If this is not possible the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode child restraint mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop This can also result in the passen ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF See Child restraints earlier in this section for proper use and installation If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash However heavy objec
486. use an extender Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints If the child restraint is not secured properly the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud den stop SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE e To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work properly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the webbing is found the entire seat belt as sembly should be replaced Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 29 CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained In addition to the general information in this manual child safety information is available from many other sources including doctors teachers government traffic safety offices and community organizations Every child is different so be sure to learn the b
487. use serious and expensive damage to the transmission If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies Turn the ignition key to the OFF po sition and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ig nition key to the LOCK position This may damage the steering lock mechanism If the speed or distance must necessarily be Two wheel drive models greater remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving rear wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated 6 12 Incase of emergency Four wheel drive models INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated A CAUTION Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission VEHICLE RECOVERY freeing a stuck vehicle Pulling a stuck vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use a tow strap or other device designed specifi cally for vehicle recovery Always follow the re
488. ushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions in all rows They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag may 1 64 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system cause abrasions or other injuries Side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants Because of this the force of the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against these air bag modules during inflation The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over The curtain and rollover air bag will remain in flated for a short time The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START posi tion After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system
489. v erage fuel economy and distance to empty Audio climate control temperature settings and Navigation System Audio 4 6 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Information 8 00 PY Fuet Economy Tire Pressure Trip Computer Maintenance een HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Press the INFO button the display screen shows vehicle and navigation information for your con venience The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle See the following for details Information gt Fuel Economy 8 00 Distance To Empty kk KK mile Average Fuel Economy Fuel Economy 1 9 8 Ga Fuel Economy Record Fuel economy Press the INFO button then select the Fuel Economy key using the INFINITI controller and press the ENTER button to display Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy Record Distance to empty MI or km The Distance To Empty DTE mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption The display is updated every 30 seconds When the fuel level is low the DTE display will change to NOTE If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small the dis play just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position may con tinue to b
490. ver s or passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the windows is canceled Instruments and controls 2 47 Window lock button 2 Power door lock switch 3 Front passenger side automatic switch 4 Right rear passenger window automatic switch 5 Left rear passenger window automatic switch 6 Driver side automatic switch 2 48 Instruments and controls Driver s side power window switch The driver s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close the front and rear passenger windows To open a window push the switch and hold it down To close a window pull the switch and hold it up To stop the opening or closing function at any time simply release the switch Front passenger s power window switch The passenger s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger s window To open the window push the switch and hold it down To close the window pull the switch up Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed only the driver s side window can be opened or closed Push it again to cancel the window lock function WIC1255 Rear power window switch The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows To open the window push the switch and hold it down Q To close the window pull the switch up of N LIC0410 Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with automati
491. w mirror see Automatic anti glare rearview mirror earlier in this section Heated mirrors The outside mirrors can be heated to defrost defog or de ice for improved visibility For addi tional information see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER The automatic drive positioner system has two features Memory storage function Entry exit function MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Two positions for the driver s seat steering wheel accelerator and brake pedals and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive po sitioner memory Follow these procedures to use the memory system 1 Place the shift selector in the P Park posi tion 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Adjust the driver s seat steering wheel ac celerator and brake pedals and outside mir rors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch For addi tional information see Seats in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemen tal restraint system section of this manual and Steering wheel Pedal position ad justment and Outside mirrors earlier in this section During this step do not place the ignition switch in any position other than ON 4 Push the SET switch and within 5 seconds push the memory switch 1 or 2 The indicator light for the pus
492. water spotted e Avoid using tight napped or rough cloths such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other foreign sub stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water Inside flanges seams and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be cleaned regularly Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance Polishing is recommended to remove built up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re applying wax An INFINITI dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash ing Follow the instructions supplied with the wax Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compounding or aggressive polishing ona base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage o
493. we 4 11 Shift lock release aoaaa aa 5 16 Shifting Automatic transmission 5 14 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 28 Side air bag system See supplemental side air bag curtain and rollover air bag systems 1 64 Sonar Front system ala a acm dba dow 2 2 33 5 53 Rear system i a dae eae oe ee 5 52 Spark plug replacement 8 16 Speedometer 00 002 eens 2 4 SRS warning label 1 66 Starting Before starting the engine 5 11 SUMS Staring s x acea a mn a a a 6 8 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Push Staing s a a do be oe taei 6 10 Starting the engine aaao 5 12 Startup screen aoaaa es 4 5 Steering Heated steering wheel 2 31 Power steering fluid 8 11 Power steering system 5 49 Tilting steering wheel 3 24 Steering wheel audio control switch 4 51 Soeh ei 4 2 6 ete s bee Oa se bes 8 28 Soage aw fea ww we eo See 2 36 Overhead storage compartment 2 39 Storage bin 2 bad a ea x 2 39 2 43 OUN VISOS s ao be Fk ae Hk he ewok ee 3 26 Sunglasses case 020 00 es 2 37 Sunglasses holder 04 2 37 Sunroof see Moonroof 2 50 10 6 Supplemental air bag warning labels 1 66 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 67 2 13 Supplemental front impact air bag system 1 59 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels 1
494. weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver Weight distribution hitch This type of hitch is also called a load leveling or equalizing hitch A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight hitch weight of your trailer Many vehicles can t carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels This gives stability to the tow vehicle A weight distributing hitch system Class IV is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5 000 lbs Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight distributing hitch system NOTE A weight distributing hitch system may af fect the operation of trailer surge brakes If you are considering use of a weight distributing hitch system with a surge brake equipped trailer check with the surge brake hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done Follow the instructions provided by the manufac turer for installing and using the weight distributing hitch system General set up instructions are as follows 1 Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and the doors closed allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level 2 Measure the height of a reference point on the fr
495. when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B and C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con crete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance AWARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B and C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and exces sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor mance which all passenger
496. when tow mode is selected Press the tow mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF Tow mode is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Instruments and controls 2 33 CLOCK POWER OUTLET For additional information refer to Tow mode in the Technical and consumer information sec tion later in this manual LIC1215 If the power supply is disconnected the clock will Front row not indicate the correct time Readjust the time The power outlets are for powering electrical ADJUSTING THE TIME accessories such as cellular telephones The power outlets located on the driver s side of the instrument panel and in the luggage area are powered directly by the vehicle s battery To adjust the time press either adjusting button Q repeatedly until correct time is displayed The power outlets located on the passenger s side of the instrument panel and in the 2nd row are powered only when the ignition key is placed in the ACC or ON position Open the cap to use a power outlet 2 34 Instruments and controls LICO665 2nd row A CAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter See your INFINITI dealer for additional information Do not use with accessories that ex ceed a 12 volt 120W 10A powe
497. witch for the driver s seat Is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating When the memory switch 1 or 2 is not pushed and held for at least 1 second When the seat has been already moved to the memorized position When no seat position is stored in the memory switch When the shift selector is moved from P Park to any other position When the driver s door remains open more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled See Comfort amp Conve nience settings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 31 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Control panel buttons color screen with Navigation SYSICM ceseccicwee sudo euubeeeeetsva sx 4 2 How to use the INFINITI controller 4 3 How to use the touch screen 000 eee eee 4 3 Start up SCreen a4 52c52 ueen lt sasansas eeoeee beer 4 5 How to select menus on the screen 4 5 How to use the STATUS button 4 6 How to use the INFO button 0005 4 6 How to use the SETTING button 4 11 D OFF button 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 4 18 RearView Monitor 0 000 cc cee eee eee eee ees 4 18 How to read the displayed lines 4 19 Adjusting th
498. witch on the Intel ligent Cruise Control system display and the CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate After you hold the ON OFF switch on for longer than about 1 5 seconds the Intelligent Cruise Control system display goes out The CRUISE indicator stays lit You can now set your desired cruising speed Pushing the ON OFF switch again will turn the system com pletely off When the ignition switch is turned off the system is also automatically turned off To use the Intelli gent Cruise Control again push the ON OFF switch vehicle to vehicle distance control mode or push and hold it conventional cruise control mode again to turn it on A CAUTION To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control make sure to turn the ON OFF switch off when not using the Intelligent Cruise Control To set cruising speed accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it The SET indicator light will come on Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your vehicle will maintain the set speed To pass another vehicle depress the ac celerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle will return to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills If this happens drive without the cruise control The preset speed can be cancelled using any of these methods Push the CANCEL button The SET indica
499. witching the room light switch to the OFF position HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft 10 m away from the vehicle The operating distance de pends upon the conditions around the vehicle The remote keyless entry function will not func tion under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range When the doors or the rear liftgate are open or not closed securely When the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged A CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle Ay a WPD0359 Locking doors Is Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion Close all doors Press the button on the Intelligent Key The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once All doors will be locked A CAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 Unlocking doors WPD0360 1 Press the if Key button on the Intelligent 2 The hazard warning lights flash once 3 Press the button again within 5 sec onds to unlock all doors All doors will be locked automatica
500. ws the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically The autolight system can Turn on the headlights front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights au tomatically when it is dark Turn off all the lights when it is light Keep all the lights on for up to 180 seconds after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed 2 26 Instruments and controls NOTE Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad justed See Comfort amp convenience set tings in the Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems sec tion later in this manual To turn on the autolight system 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi tion 2 Turn the ignition switch to ON 3 The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off Initially if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a door Is opened and left open the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes If another door is opened during the 5 minutes then the 5 minute timer is reset To turn the autolight system off turn the switch to the OFF P4 or position Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor 1 located in the top side of the instrument panel The autolight sensor controls the autolight if it is cov ered the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate If this oc
501. ys 2 Mechanical keys inside Intelligent Keys 3 Key number plate INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle s Intel ligent Key system components and the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System components Never leave these keys in the vehicle As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with 1 vehicle The new keys must be registered by an INFINITI dealer prior to use with 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments the Intelligent Key system and the INFINITI Ve hicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the INFINITI dealer A CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the Intelligent Key Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60
502. ystem 1 49 All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat Booster seat installation A CAUTION Do not use the lap shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety Child Restraint and Booster Seats sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat 1 50 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0699 If you must install a booster seat in the front seat move the seat to the rear most position Position the booster seat on the seat Only place it in a front facing direction Always follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions LRS0454 Front passenger position 3 The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit If the head restraint is removed store it ina secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed See Head restraint adjustment i

2010 Infiniti QX56 Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents